Home

User`s Guide

1. Troubleshooting Action Step 4 Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Yes From the printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on 323 No Go to step 5 Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Step 6 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 6 Go to step 7 The problem is solved The problem is solved Step 7 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too light Printer is printing blank pages Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Check if there is packing material left on the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Checkifthe packing material is properly removed from the i
2. 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 176 Paper and specialty media guide Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Output expander and high capacity output expander Staple finisher 184 Staple hole punch finisher lt 1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it Preprinted 2 p 90 176 g m x J E 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v vV Colored Pa 2 per 90 176 g m x J x 24 47 lb bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v v Light an 2 gnt paper 90 176 g m a J r 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v vV Hea 2 vy paper 90 176 g m x J 7 24 47 lb bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v vV Rough cott 2 gh cotton 90 176 g m J 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m Custom t 2 ype x 90 176 g m 4 J x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 176 Understanding the printer menus Understanding the printer menus Menus list Paper Menu Default Source Paper Size Type Configure MP Substitute Size Paper Texture Paper Weight Paper Loadi
3. 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 272 3 Insert the tray 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch oS or Done e For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam clear manual feeder 250 1 From the multipurpose feeder firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 273 2 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges ona level surface 3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder 4 Slide the paper guide until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper 5 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 1 From the stapler bin firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 274 2 Open the stapler door 3 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull
4. 5 Load paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop e Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time e Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 61 e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher not One sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 62 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer e Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or Univer
5. e Network setup page Use this page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration Note Make sure your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network For more information see the following Printing a network setup page on page 73 for non touch screen printer models Printing a network setup page on page 120 or Printing a network setup page on page 168 for touch screen printer models Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 40 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model Standard bin Printer control panel Multipurpose feeder hl win e Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 41 The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit www lexmark com multifunctionpr
6. Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings e Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity e The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode 3 Select a setting Using MS810de 122 Use To On Reduce printer noise Notes Print job
7. The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est conforme a la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re
8. Feed Direction Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction Short Edge Notes Long Edge Short Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray 196 Understanding the printer menus Bin Setup menu Use Output Bin Standard Bin Bin x Configure Bins Mailbox Link Mail Overflow Link Optional Type Assignment Overflow Bin Standard Bin Bin x To Specify the default bin Notes Specify configuration options for bins Notes Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full Notes If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name appears only once in the menu Standard Bin is the factory default setting Mailbox is the factory default setting This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox Link configures all available bins as one large bin Mail Overflow configures each bin as a separate mailbox Link Optional links all available bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a bin or linked bin set Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected Standard Bin is the factory default setting If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the name only appears once in the bin list x can be
9. Setting the paper size and type on page 43 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a new custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a new custom paper type name Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 64 3 Press OK 4 Press Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type t
10. e Cancel the current print job Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Load staples Try one or more of the following e Replace or insert the specified staple cartridge in the finisher e Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the print job Load paper source with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 289 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer mo
11. e Off is the factory default setting e Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu Auto LF after CR Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a On carriage return CR control command Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu Understanding the printer menus 240 HTML menu Use aK Font Name Joanna MT Set the default font for HTML documents Albertus MT Letter Gothic Note The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not Antique Olive Lubalin Graph specify a font Apple Chancery Marigold Arial MT Monalisa Recut Avant Garde Monaco Bodoni New CenturySbk Bookman New York Chicago Optima Clarendon Oxford Cooper Black Palatino Copperplate StempelGaramond Coronet Taffy Courier Times Eurostile TimesNewRoman Garamond Univers Geneva Zapf Chancery Gill Sans NewSansMTJA Goudy NewSansMTCS Helvetica NewSansMTCT Hoefler Text NewSansMTKO Intl CG Times Intl Courier Intl Univers Font Size Set the default font size for HTML documents 1 255 pt Notes 12 ptis the factory default setting e Font size can be increased in 1 point increments Scale Scale the default font for HTML documents 1 400 Notes e 100 is the factory default setting e Scaling can be increased in 1 increments Orientation Set the page orientation for HTML documents Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting
12. Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stopt The printer stops when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled 2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Using MS812de 167 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds that number all of the jobs for that user are deleted e Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within that time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Click Submit to save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address fie
13. Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Click Add and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookmark is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 87 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Understanding Eco Settings Icon Description The application lets you easily manage energy consumption noise toner and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer Using MS810de 90 Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the pri
14. e Make sure your access point wireless router is turned on and is working properly Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network e ssiD The SSID is also referred to as the network name e Wireless Mode or Network Mode The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc e Channel for ad hoc networks The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select e Security Method There are four basic options for Security Method WEP key If your network uses more than one WEP key then enter up to four in the provided spaces Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security The choices are AES or TKIP Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network 802 1X RADIUS If you are installing the printer on an 802 1X network then you may need the following e Authentication type e Inner authentication type e 802 1X user name and password e Certificates No security If your wireless network does not use any type of security then you will not have any security information Note We do not recommen
15. to confirm Remove paper from bin x Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from linked set bin name Remove paper from the specified bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from standard output bin Remove the paper stack from the standard bin The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing Troubleshooting 295 If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy Replace the toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy Install a toner cartridge that mat
16. 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oO NnN oO wu BR Ww Output expander 4 bin mailbox Using MS810de 83 The staple hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options e In a configuration with three optional finishers the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order e In a configuration with two optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander When using optional trays Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration Amaximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel Use the 1 Display 2 Home button ae View the printer status Set up and operate the printer Go to the home screen 3 Sleep button 4 Keypad Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep Mode e Press any hard button e Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder e Open a door or cover Send a print job from the computer e Perform a power on reset with
17. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Notices 350 Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing
18. Landscape Understanding the printer menus 241 Margin Size Set the page margin for HTML documents 8 255 mm Notes e 19 mm is the factory default setting e Margin size can be increased in 1 mm increments Backgrounds Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents Do Not Print Print Note Print is the factory default setting Image menu Use To Auto Fit Select the optimal paper size scaling and orientation On Note On is the factory default setting It overrides scaling and orientation settings Off for some images Invert Invert bitonal monochrome images On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images Scaling Scale the image to fit the selected paper size Anchor Top Left Notes Best Fit aa f Anchor Center e Best Fit is the factory default setting Fit Height Width e When Auto Fit is set to On Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit Fit Height Fit Width Orientation Set the image orientation Portrait Note Portrait is the factory default setting Landscape Reverse Portrait Reverse Landscape Help menu Menu item Description Print All Guides Prints all the guides Print Quality Provides information about solving print quality issues Printing Guide Provides information about loading paper and other specialty media Media Guide Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays an
19. d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the setting and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch a Using MS810de 113 Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printin
20. navigate to aJ gt Settings gt gt Settings gt gt General Settings gt 2 Select Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button and then press OK 3 Press Hibernate gt OK Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more information see Printing a menu settings page on page 73 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 78 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk are not affected From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings ROK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Factory Defaults gt OK gt Restore Now gt OK Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 77 Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the
21. section see if the status is Connected Setting up serial printing Windows only After installing the serial or communication COM port configure the printer and the computer Note Serial printing reduces print speed 1 Set the parameters in the printer a From the control panel navigate to the menu for the port settings b Locate the menu for the serial port settings and then adjust the settings if necessary c Save the settings 2 From your computer open the printers folder and then select your printer 3 Open the printer properties and then select the COM port from the list 4 Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager Use the Run dialog box to open the command prompt and then type devmgmt msc Verifying printer setup When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following e Menu settings page Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page If an option you installed is not listed then it is not installed correctly Remove the option and then install it again For more information see the following Printing a menu settings page on page 73 for non touch screen printer models Printing a menu settings page on page 119 or Printing a menu settings page on page 167 for touch screen printer models
22. see Accessing the controller board on page 11 2 Unpack the memory card Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card Doing so may cause damage 3 Align the notch 1 on the memory card with the ridge 2 on the connector Additional printer setup 16 4 Push the memory card straight into the connector and then push the card toward the controller board wall until it clicks into place 5 Reattach the controller board shield and then the controller board access cover Installing an Internal Solutions Port The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port ISP Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 11 2 Ifan optional printer hard disk is i
23. then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 4 Access the WPS settings For more information see the documentation that came with your access point 5 Enter the eight digit PIN and then save the setting Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server Before you begin make sure that e Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network e A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer control panel The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Network Ports gt Wireless Additional printer setup 39 3 Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point wireless router Note Make sure to enter the correct SSID security method preshared key or passphrase network mode and channel 4 Click Submit 5 Turn off the printer and then disconnect the Ethernet cable Then wait for at least five seconds and then turn the printer back on 6 To verify if your printer is connected to the network print a network setup page Then in the Network Card x
24. 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and then confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part e All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the printer control panel navigate to gt Status Supplies gt OK View Supplies gt OK Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 74 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mod
25. 247 Item Return Program cartridge For the European Union European Economic Area and Switzerland Toner Cartridge 522 High Yield Toner Cartridge 522H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 522x For the Asia Pacific Region includes Australia and New Zealand Toner Cartridge 523 High Yield Toner Cartridge 523H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 523X For Latin America includes Puerto Rico and Mexico Toner Cartridge 524 High Yield Toner Cartridge 524H Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 524x For Africa Middle East Central Eastern Europe and Commonwealth of Independent States Toner Cartridge 525 525H 525X High Yield Toner Cartridge Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812de printer models For more information on countries located in each region visit www lexmark com regions lt J Item Regular cartridge Worldwide High Yield Toner Cartridge 520HAt Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 520XA2 1 This cartridge is supported only in MS810n and MS810dn printer models 2 This cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812de printer models Ordering an imaging unit Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner For more information on replacing the imaging unit see the instruction
26. 3 Do one or more of the From the printer control panel set the paper texture type and weight in following the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray e Specify the paper texture type and Do the paper texture type and weight match the paper in the tray weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray e Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper texture type and weight specified in the tray settings Troubleshooting 329 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 b Resend the print job Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved T
27. 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing e The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing e When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance e f you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper then you may use the MS710 Series printer models which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed For more information on the MS710 Series printer models contact your Lexmark sales representative 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch Submit Using MS812de 139 Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes e When loading folio legal or Oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and then pull it out completely e Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam Using MS812de 140 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper
28. 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting e Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the printer control panel before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 to 900 seconds 30 seconds is the factory default setting Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off Settings range from 1 to 120 seconds 10 minutes is the factory default setting Minimum PIN Length Limit the digit length of the PIN 1 16 Note 4 is the factory default setting a ee Confidential Print menu Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered off Notes 2 10 e This menu appears only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Once the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 213 Use Confidential Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Repeat Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Verify Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week To Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted Notes e If the Confidential Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk then the expiration tim
29. 71 adjusting brightness 243 administrator settings 71 117 165 checking the status of parts 73 120 168 checking the status of supplies 73 120 168 copying settings to other printers 72 119 167 modifying confidential print settings 72 118 166 networking settings 71 117 165 problem accessing 333 Embedded Web Server Administrator s Guide where to find 126 174 354 Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide where to find 71 117 165 Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide where to find 80 emission notices 337 343 344 345 348 349 350 Empty the hole punch box 285 emptying the hole punch box 256 encrypting the printer hard disk 79 125 173 envelopes loading 58 105 153 tips on using 175 environmental settings conserving supplies 244 Eco Mode 74 120 168 Hibernate mode 76 122 170 printer display brightness adjusting 243 Quiet mode 75 121 169 Sleep Mode 122 Sleep mode 75 170 Erase Temporary Data Files menu 213 erasing hard disk memory 79 125 173 erasing non volatile memory 78 124 172 erasing volatile memory 78 124 172 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 285 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 285 Ethernet network preparing to set up for Ethernet printing 35 Ethernet port 32 Ethernet setup preparing for an 35 exporting a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 90 137 exterior of the printer cleaning 255 F factory defaults restoring 122 170
30. File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Using MS812de 163 Recommended flash drives File type Lexar JumpDrive FireFly 512MB and 1GB Documents SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB e pdf e Sony Micro Vault Classic 512MB and 1GB xps Images e dcx e gif e jpeg or jpg e bmp e pcx e tiff or tif e png e fls Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to BH gt Security gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Use To Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 1 9 Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted
31. IP address in the address field 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Using MS810de 88 Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Do one or more of the following e Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit e Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 88 or see the documentation that came with the application Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 87 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the fol
32. Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Mes Troubleshooting Action Step 3 Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet Yes Go to step 4 300 No Plug one end of the power cord into the printer and the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 4 Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet Does other electrical equipment work Step 5 Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted in the correct ports Are the cables inserted in the correct ports Unplug the other electrical equipment and then turn on the printer If the printer does not work then reconnect the other electrical equipment Go to step 6 Go to step 5 Make sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable with the Ethernet port Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors uninterruptible power supplies or extension cords power cord directly to a properly grounded electrical outlet Step 6 Turn on the switch or Go to step 7 Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off
33. Yes No Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Step 3 The problem is solved Go to step 4 a Depending on your operating system open Printing Preferences or the Print dialog and then specify the paper type b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper The problem is solved Contact customer Step 4 support a Check if the trays are not linked b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Large jobs do not collate Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a From the Finishing menu on the printer control panel set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 a From the printer software set Collate to 1 2 3 1 2 3 Note Setting Collate to 1 1 1 2 2 2 in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu b Resend the print job Did the job print and collate correctly The problem is solved Contact customer Step 3 support Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and
34. a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Industry Canada compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de l industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 Notices 349 Japanese VCCI notice HimlCCOPFNIVERRENTWSEE
35. an automatically selected tray e Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray e Cancel the current job Maintenance kit low 80 xy You may need to order a maintenance kit For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message If necessary select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact customer support and then report the message Troubleshooting 291 If necessary select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or c
36. and then touch itl 3 Press on the keypad to return to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS810de 118 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Configuring supply notifications from the Embe
37. battery in this product is not intended to be replaced There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Do not recharge disassemble or incinerate a lithium battery Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet e Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer e f two or more optional finishers are installed then remove the finishers individually from the printer Notes Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first Toremove the finisher hold the finisher on both sides and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher e ifthe printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays then remove the trays Note Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of th
38. cartridge 5 Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place 6 Close the stapler door Cleaning printer parts Cleaning the printer Note You may need to perform this task after every few months Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty 1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding 2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder 3 Remove any dust lint and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum Maintaining the printer 256 4 Dampen a clean lint free cloth with water and use it to wipe the outside of the printer Warning Potential Damage Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the exterior of the printer 5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job Emptying the hole punch box 1 Pull out the hole punch box 2 Empty the container Maintaining the printer 257 3 Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it clicks into place Moving the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires
39. communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then processes it appropriately e When set to On the printer performs NPA processing If the data is not in NPA format it is rejected as bad data e When set to Off the printer does not perform NPA processing e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Serial Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Set the size of the serial input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed e The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus 209 Use To Job Buffering Temporarily store print job
40. display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part e All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen navigate to Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure that the computer and printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS812de 169 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode 3 Select a setting Off Use the factory default settings for all settings ass
41. e When using card stock labels or other types of specialty media make sure the paper is below the dashed line which is the alternate paper fill indicator 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 51 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place 52 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 53 at Bs Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Usi
42. factory default setting e Off disables parallel port negotiation Understanding the printer menus 207 Use To Protocol Specify the parallel port protocol Standard Notes Fastbytes Fastbytes is the factory default setting It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems Honor Init Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the On computer Off Notes Parallel Mode 2 On Off Mac Binary PS On e Off is the factory default setting The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobe Note On is the factory default setting Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Serial x menu Notes Off Auto e Auto is the factory default setting e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol e On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs ENA Address Set the network address information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Netmask Set the netmask information for an external print server
43. finisher is functioning properly Note This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Hole Punch Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of collecting On the sheets in a binder or folder Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Hole Punch Mode Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose of 2 holes collecting the sheets in a binder or folder 3 holes Notes 4 holes e 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Offset Pages Offset pages at certain instances None Notes Between Copies Between Jobs e None is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed e This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch sc
44. flushed against the controller board 5 Close the controller board access door Note When the printer software and any hardware options are installed it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 34 Installing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 11 2 Unpack the printer hard disk Additional printer setup 23 3 Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage ELERAN Note If an optional ISP is currently installed then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP Additional printer setup 24 To install a printer ha
45. format request Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in the printer The flash memory option card must not be read write or write protected This menu item appears only when a formatted working flash memory card is installed Delete downloads from the printer hard disk including all held jobs buffered jobs and parked jobs Notes Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to return to the originating screen after the deletion Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem Notes e When activated all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not executed e To exit or deactivate Hex Trace turn off the printer Coverage Estimator Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page The estimate is Off printed on a separate page at the end of each print job On Note Off is the factory default setting XPS menu Print Error Pages Off On Print a page containing information on errors including XML markup errors Note Off is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 235 PDF menu Scale to Fit Scale page content to fit the selected paper size Yes Note No is the factory default setting No Annotati
46. from the Held Jobs menu Notes e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel e All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs 2 Touch Submit Using MS812de 164 Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN uw Click OK or Print oO From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If nec
47. if you have trouble reading the display adjust its brightness settings Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings 3 Inthe Screen Brightness field enter the brightness percentage you want for the display 4 Click Submit Saving paper and toner Studies show that as much as 80 of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting see the following e Using Eco Mode on page 74 for non touch screen printer models e Using Eco Mode on page 120 and Using Eco Mode on page 168 for touch screen printer models Using recycled paper As an environmentally conscious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers For more information on recycled papers that work well
48. in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The printer contains internally a Class IIIb 3b laser that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787 800 nanometers The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Laser advisory label A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown Notices 339 DANGER Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated Avoid exposure to laser beam PERIGO Radia o a laser invis vel sera liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido Evite a exposi o aos feixes de laser Opasnost Nevidljivo lasersko zra enje kada su kasete uklonjene i poni tena sigurnosna veza Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima NEBEZPE Kdy jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokov na pojistka ze za zen je vys l no neviditeln laserov z en Nevystavujte se p soben laserov ho paprsku FARE Usynlig laserstraling n r patroner fjernes og sp rreanordningen er sl et fra Undg at blive udsat for laserstralen GEVAAR Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer c
49. inch 0 25 30 00 Notes e 6 is the factory default setting Lines per Inch can be increased or decreased in 0 25 inch increments Page Format Sets the logical and physical printable area of the page Print Notes Whole e Print is the factory default setting Print data maintains its position with respect to edge of the paper e When Whole is selected document margins are calculated from the top left corner of the physical edge of the page e Printing does not occur outside the printable area Character Set Specifies a default character set for PPDS print jobs 1 Notes 2 e 2 is the factory default setting Character Set 2 is composed of printable characters and symbols used in non US English languages e When Characters Set 1 is selected values given to the printer are interpreted as printer commands Best Fit Replaces a missing font with a similar font On Note On is the factory default setting If the requested font is not found the Off printer will use a similar font Understanding the printer menus 239 Menu item Description Tray 1 Renumber Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use Off different source assignments for trays drawers and feeders Tray 2 Notes e Off is the factory default setting e Tray 2 is displayed only when it is installed Auto CR after LF Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after On a line feed LF control command Off Notes
50. indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810de 110 Linking and unlinking trays Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking e To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray e To unlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 91 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the
51. into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer restarts several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS812de 173 Erasing printer hard disk memory Notes Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed e Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material
52. is enabled 2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings Note This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings tab gt Security gt Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts all of the jobs for that user are deleted e Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in network printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to lo
53. job This setting is useful when printing on transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes Separator Sheet Source Tray x Manual Feeder Multipurpose Feeder Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting MP Feeder Blank Pages Specify if blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models X Print Settings Setup menu Printer Language PCL Emulation PS Emulation Set the default printer language Notes e PCL Emulation is the factory default setting PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for processing print jobs e PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs e Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language Understanding the printer menus Use Job Waiting On Off Print Area Normal Fit to Page Whole Page Download Target RAM Flash Disk Resource Save On Off 228 To Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings They are stored in a separate print queue so other jobs print normally When the missing information or options o
54. left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on the touch screen displays a list of functions 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task e Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer h
55. loaded loaded in the tray to match the paper type and weight specified in the tray settings Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints Step 4 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do shadow images still appear on prints XR Go to step 4 Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved Skewed print Troubleshooting 327 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved a Check if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray support b Resend the print job Is the print still skewed Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the tray or feeder from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper type From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper and weight to match menu to match the paper loaded in th
56. loading on multiple printers 72 119 167 menu settings page printing 73 119 167 menus Active NIC 198 AppleTalk 203 Bin Setup 196 Confidential Print 212 Configure MP 189 Custom Bin Names 195 Custom Names 194 Custom Types 194 Default Source 186 Edit Security Setups 211 Erase Temporary Data Files 213 Finishing 229 General Settings 215 Help 241 HTML 240 Image 241 IPv6 202 Job Accounting 232 list of 185 Miscellaneous 212 Network x 198 Network Card 200 Network Reports 200 Paper Loading 193 Paper Size Type 186 Paper Texture 190 Paper Weight 191 Parallel x 205 PCL Emul 235 PDF 235 PostScript 235 PPDS 238 Print Settings 225 Quality 232 Reports 197 Security Audit Log 214 Serial x 207 Set Date and Time 214 Setup 227 SMTP Setup menu 210 Standard Network 198 Standard USB 204 Substitute Size 189 TCP IP 200 Universal Setup 195 Utilities 234 356 Wireless 202 XPS 234 Miscellaneous menu 212 mobile device printing from 67 114 162 moving the printer 9 10 257 259 multipurpose feeder loading 58 105 153 N Network x menu 198 Network x software error 54 291 Network Card menu 200 Network Reports menu 200 network settings Embedded Web Server 71 117 165 network setup page printing 73 120 168 Networking Guide where to find 71 117 165 noise emission levels 337 noise printer reducing 75 121 non volatile memory 77 123 171 erasing 78 124 172 Not enough free spa
57. low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes e Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit e All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply will appear on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an email about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached
58. may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears The printer will restart se
59. or button select from the following options Display Do not display Notes e Profiles and Apps appears only in touch screen printer models Display is the factory default setting for Search Held Jobs Held jobs and USB Drive Do not display is the factory default setting for Change Language Profiles and Apps Bookmarks and Jobs by user Change the icons and buttons that appear on the control panel For each icon or button select from the following options Display Do not display Notes e Forms and Favorites Background and Idle Screen and Eco Settings appear only in touch screen printer models Display is the factory default setting Date Format MM DD YYYY DD MM YYYY YYYY MM DD Format the printer date Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models e MM DD YYVYY is the US factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Time Format 12 hour A M P M 24 hour clock Screen Brightness 20 100 Output Lighting Normal Standby Mode off Dim Bright 220 To Format the printer time Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Specify the brightness of the display Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 100 is the factory default setting Set the amount of light from the bin Notes e f Eco Mode is set to Energy or Energy Paper then the factory default setting is Dim e f Eco Mode is se
60. or more trained personnel to lift it safely When selecting a location for the printer leave enough room to open trays covers and doors If you plan to install any hardware options then leave enough room for them also It is important to Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet e Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard e Provide a flat sturdy and stable surface Keep the printer Clean dry and free of dust Away from stray staples and paper clips Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners heaters or ventilators Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations Ambient temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Storage temperature 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Right side 152 mm 6 in Front 508 mm 20 in Left side 152 mm 6 in Rear 152 mm 6 in Top 115 mm 4 5 in Selecting a location for the printer Right side 152 mm 6 in Front Left side 508 mm 20 in 152 mm 6 in Rear 152 mm 6 in Top 115 mm 4 5 in lt l i P aS je x i SS KS l 2 sL Right side 152 mm 6 in Front 508 mm 20 in Left side 152 mm 6 in Rear 152 mm 6 in Top 115 mm 4 5 in
61. paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Ni Yes The problem is solved 319 No Contact customer support X Paper curl Action Step 1 Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded Are the width and length guides positioned correctly Yes Go to step 2 No Adjust the width and length guides Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Go to step 3 Specify the paper type and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Step 4 a Remove the paper from the tray and then turn it over b Resend the print job Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the paper still curled Go to step 4 Is the paper still curled Go to step 5 Is the paper still curled Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved The prob
62. print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Checking the virtual display 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS812de 166 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly
63. screw it on too tightly 11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded 20 Additional printer setup 21 Installing an optional card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 11 2 Unpack the optional card Warning Potential Damage Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card 3 Holding the card by its sides align the plastic pins 1 on the card with the holes 2 on the controller board 4 Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration Warning Potential Damage Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the controller board Additional printer setup 22 Note The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be
64. service representative for additional suggestions The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to Director of Lexmark Technology amp Services Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 859 232 3000 Industry Canada compliance statement This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Avis de conformit aux normes de Il industrie du Canada Cet appareil num rique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux quipements pouvant causer des interf rences NMB 003 HA VCCI AE r gt Mm COV ERRENTA RA ROBES WHEKLCWET CORBI JAA BRINE CT TORE Ae OEATSCO Ee AME LTWETA OO WAENI STETU EY a VZETA L CH ENS L SBE RSMO TILEN ET WR ABC Hes TIEL
65. sheet that came with the supply Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular Imaging unit 520Z 520ZA Maintaining the printer 248 Ordering staple cartridges Part number Staple cartridges 25A0013 Ordering a roller kit For more information on replacing the roller kit see the instruction sheet that came with the part Lexmark roller kit and part number Part number Printer engine roller maintenance kit 40X7706 Ordering a maintenance kit To identify the supported fuser type view the label on the fuser Do either of the following e Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be seen on the front of the fuser Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems e Pull down the printer rear door The two digit fuser type code such as 00 or 01 can be seen on the rear of the fuser Notes e Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit The separator roller fuser pick roller assembly and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary For more information on replacing the maintenance kit see the instruction sheet that came with the supply Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810 MS811 a
66. the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 72 Notification Off Description The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the supply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification
67. the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the print job Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the print job Check tray x connection Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on If the error occurs a second time then 1 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the specified tray Reattach the tray uu A U N Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on If the error occurs again then 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the tray 4 Contact customer support e Toclear the message and resume the job select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Close door or insert cartridge The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly Insert the
68. the holder out of the printer 4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard and then remove any loose staples A a Om _ EEE Clearing jams 275 5 Press down the staple guard until it clicks into place 6 Press the staples against the metal bracket Note If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge then shake the cartridge downward to bring the staples near the metal bracket Clearing jams 276 7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place 8 Close the stapler door 9 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch a or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK Clearing jams 277 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 1 Open the rear staple finisher door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the staple finisher door Clearing jams 278 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch oS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 1 Open the rea
69. the main power switch e Attach a device to the USB port on the printer Enter numbers letters or symbols 5 Stop or Cancel button 6 Indicator light Stop all printer activity Check the status of the printer Using MS810de 84 Use the USB port _ a flash drive to the printer Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle The printer requires user intervention Blinking red Sleep button light Printer status Off Solid amber The printer is off idle or in Ready state The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow pulsing pattern The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode The printer is in Hibernate mode Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrati
70. the number of pages in the job Did the job print and collate correctly Troubleshooting Multiple language PDF files do not print Action Step 1 a Checkifthe print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts b Generate a new PDF file and then resend the print job Do the files print Step 2 a Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat b Click File gt Print gt Advanced gt Print As Image gt OK gt OK Do the files print Yes The problem is solved 305 No Go to step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer support Print job takes longer than expected Action Step 1 Change the environmental settings of the printer a From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings b Select Eco Mode or Quiet Mode and then select Off Note Disabling Eco Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the consumption of energy or supplies or both Did the job print Yes The problem is solved Go to step 2 Step 2 Reduce the number and size of fonts the number and complexity of images and the number of pages in the print job and then resend the job Did the job print Step 3 a Remove held jobs stored in the printer memory b Resend the print job Did the job print Step 4 a Disable the Page Protect feature From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery g
71. the printer control panel release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer control panel release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print e For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 70 Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Reports gt OK gt Print Fonts 2 Press the up or down arrow button to select t
72. the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Parallel x menu Note This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed Use PCL SmartSwitch On off To Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes Onis the factory default setting When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use PS SmartSwitch On Off NPA Mode On Off Auto 206 To Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then
73. the specified tray 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified tray 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on e Cancel the print job Reset the active bin Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Delete fonts macros and other data from the printer memory e Install additional printer memory Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Troubleshooting 288 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory Insufficient memory to collate job 37 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm
74. the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required Notes Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part e All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter or A4 size plain paper Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel From the home screen touch Status Supplies gt View Supplies Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server Note Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Device Status gt More Details Saving energy Using Eco Mode 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode Using MS810de 121 3 Select a setting
75. then click Submit Does an error message appear in the log Step 2 Resolve the error ems Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Is the application working now Mn 333 No Contact customer support Contact customer support Embedded Web Server does not open Action Step 1 Make sure the printer IP address is correct View the printer IP address From the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Is the printer IP address correct Step 2 Check if the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 No Type the correct printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser Note Depending on the network settings you may need to type https instead of http before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server Turn on the printer A E Troubleshooting 334 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 Contact your system Check if the network connection is working support person Is the network connection working Step 4 Go to step 5 Tighten the cable Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure connection For more inf
76. tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Custom Name x Specify a custom name fora paper type This name replaces the Custom Type x name in the printer menus Note This menu item appears only in touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus 195 Custom Bin Names menu Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin Bin x Specify a custom name for Bin x Universal Setup menu Use Ae Units of Measure Identify the units of measure Inches Notes Millimeters e Inches is the U S factory default setting Millimeters is the international factory default setting Portrait Width Set the portrait width 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm e If the width exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum width allowed e 8 5 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the width in 0 01 inch increments e 216 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the width in 1 mm increments Portrait Height Set the portrait height 3 14 17 inches Notes 76 360 mm e Ifthe height exceeds the maximum then the printer uses the maximum height allowed 14 inches is the U S factory default setting You can increase the height in 0 01 inch increments e 356 mm is the international factory default setting You can increase the height in 1 mm increments
77. wireless connection View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network AppleTalk menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt AppleTalk e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt AppleTalk Activate Enable or disable AppleTalk support Yes No Note No is the factory default setting View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name Note The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address Note The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Set Zone list of zones available on the network Note The default zone for the network is the factory default setting Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network Understanding the printer menus Standard USB menu 204 Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to autom
78. you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to aa Paper Menu gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch SA Printing Printing forms and a document Printing forms Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 89 1 From the printer home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt adjust other settings 2 Depending on your printer model touch e A or Submit Using MS810de 112 Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary
79. 10 Additional printer setup Additional printer setup Installing internal options A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Available internal options e Memory card DDR3 DIMM Flash memory e Fonts e Firmware cards Forms and Bar Code PRESCRIBE IPDS e Printer hard disk Lexmark Internal Solutions Ports ISP Parallel 1284 B interface MarkNet N8350 802 11 b g n wireless printer server RS 232 C serial interface Accessing the controller board Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer 1 Remove the controller board access cover Additional printer setup 2 Using a screwdriver loosen the screws on the controller board shield 3 Remove the shield 12 Additional
80. 2 Do one or more of the following e Show or hide icons of basic printer functions a Click Settings gt General Settings gt Home screen customization b Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen Note If you clear a check box beside an icon then the icon does not appear on the home screen c Click Submit e Customize the icon for an application For more information see Finding information about the home screen applications on page 135 or see the documentation that came with the application Activating the home screen applications Finding information about the home screen applications Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications Before you can use these applications you must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server For more information on accessing the Embedded Web Server see Accessing the Embedded Web Server on page 87 For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications do the following 1 Go to http support lexmark com 2 Click Software Solutions and then select either of the following e Scan to Network This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application e Other Applications This lets you find information about the other applications 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Using Background and Idle Screen Use To Cus
81. 22 To Set the amount of time the printer waits before it enters Hibernate mode Notes 20 minutes i i kout e When the Hibernate Timeout timer expires the printer uses Ethernet connection to check the value of Hibernate 2 hours Timeout on Connection 3 hours e f Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Do Not 6 hours Hibernate then the printer never automatically hibernates 1 day e if Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Hibernate then 2 days the printer follows the Hibernate Timeout value except 3 days when it is set to Disabled 1 week e 3 days is the factory default setting 2 weeks 1 month Timeouts Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before Screen Timeout 15 300 sec Timeouts Prolong Screen Timeout Off On Timeouts Print Timeout Disabled 1 255 sec Timeouts Wait Timeout Disabled 15 65535 sec returning the display to a ready state Note 30 sec is the factory default setting Set the printer to continue the specified job without returning to the home screen when the Screen Timeout timer expires Notes e Prolong Screen Timeout appears only in touch screen printer models e On allows the user to reset the Screen Timeout timer instead of returning to ready state e Off follows the normal Screen Timeout value e Off is the factory default setting Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an end of job message before canceling the remainder of the prin
82. 31 234 267 x page jam open upper rear door 202 266 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 278 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 277 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 280 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 273 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 270 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 270 Cartridge low 88 xy 282 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 282 Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy 282 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 282 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 282 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 283 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 283 Check tray x connection 283 Close door or insert cartridge 283 Close rear door 284 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 284 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 284 Defective flash detected 51 284 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 284 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 284 Empty the hole punch box 285 Error reading USB drive Remove USB 285 Error reading USB hub Remove hub 285 Imaging unit low 84 xy 285 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 285 Imaging unit very low x esti
83. 9 285 Incompatible tray x 59 286 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 286 indicator light 129 printer control panel 42 83 individual settings erasing 78 individual settings information erasing 124 172 Insert hole punch box 286 Insert staple cartridge 286 Insert Tray x 286 Install bin x 287 Install Tray x 287 installing an Internal Solutions Port 16 installing an optional card 21 installing options order of installation 28 installing printer 34 installing printer hard disk 22 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 287 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 288 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 288 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 287 355 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 288 internal options 11 internal print server troubleshooting 310 Internal Solutions Port installing 16 troubleshooting 311 IP address of computer finding 87 134 IP address printer finding 87 134 IPv6 menu 202 J jams accessing 262 avoiding 260 understanding messages 262 jams clearing behind rear door 266 267 in duplex area 270 in finisher rear door 277 in multipurpose feeder 272 in rear expander door 278 in rear mailbox door 280 in standard bin 270 in staple finisher 273 in the tray 271 inside the printer 264 Job Accounting menu 232 K keypad printer control panel 42 83 129 L labels paper tips 176 letter
84. 99 Assign Manual Paper Off None 0 199 Assign Manual Env Off None 0 199 Tray Renumber View Factory Defaults MPF Default 8 T1 Default 1 T1 Default 4 T1 Default 5 T1 Default 20 T1 Default 21 Env Default 6 MPaper Default 2 MEnv Default 3 Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays and feeders Notes e Off is the factory default setting e None ignores the Select Paper Feed command This option appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter e 0 199 allows a custom setting to be assigned Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder Understanding the printer menus 238 Tray Renumber Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings Restore Defaults Yes No PPDS menu Menu item Description Orientation Sets the orientation of the text and graphics on the page Portrait Notes Landscape e Portrait is the factory default setting e Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu Lines per Page Sets the number of lines that print on each page 1 255 Notes 64 is the factory default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page Lines per Inch Sets the number of lines that print per
85. B port x disabled 56 299 printer options troubleshooting internal option is not detected 310 internal print server 310 Internal Solutions Port 311 tray problems 311 USB parallel interface card 312 printer options troubleshooting 2100 sheet tray problems 309 printer problems solving basic 299 printer security information on 80 126 174 printer setup verifying 39 printing canceling from printer control panel 117 canceling from the printer control panel 165 directory list 70 117 165 font sample list 70 116 164 forms 111 159 from a mobile device 67 114 162 from flash drive 66 113 161 from Macintosh 64 112 160 from Windows 64 112 160 menu settings page 73 119 167 network setup page 73 120 168 printing a directory list 117 165 printing a document 64 112 160 printing a font sample list 116 164 printing a menu settings page 119 167 printing a network setup page 73 120 168 printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 from Windows 69 116 164 printing forms 111 159 printing from a flash drive 66 113 161 printing from a mobile device 67 114 162 printing slows down 307 publications where to find 7 Push Button Configuration method using 37 Q Quality menu 232 Quiet mode 75 121 using 169 R Reattach bin x 292 359 Reattach bin x y 293 recycled paper using 178 243 recycling Lexmark packaging 245 Lexmark products 244 toner c
86. Cartridge nearly low 88 xy If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Change paper source to custom string load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job Change paper source to custom type name load orientation Try one or more of the following Load the correct paper size and type in the tray verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel and then select Finished changing paper For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the print job Troubleshooting 283 Change paper source to paper size load orientation Try one or more of the following Load
87. Corp at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 IKEv1 implemented in the product or service Multiple model information The following information applies to all MS810 MS811 and MS812 printer models except for the MS812de printer model STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS LEXMARK LED PRINTERS AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS Lexmark International Inc Lexington KY This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada For customers outside the U S refer to the country specific warranty information that came with your product This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use and not for resale from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer referred to in this statement as Remarketer Notices 342 Limited warranty Lexmark warrants that this product ls manufactured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts ls during normal use free from defects in material and workmanship If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement at Lexmark s option I
88. Courier 10 Note Courier 10 is the factory default setting Courier 10 shows the font name font ID and the storage location in the printer The font source abbreviation is R for Resident F for Flash K for Disk and D for Download Symbol Set Specify the symbol set for each font name 10U PC 8 Notes 12U PC 850 e 10U PC 8 is the US factory default setting 12U PC 850 is the international factory default setting e A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters punctuation and special symbols Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text Only the supported symbol sets are shown PCL Emulation Settings Point Size 1 00 1008 00 Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts Notes 12 is the factory default setting Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 0 014 inch Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0 25 point increments PCL Emulation Settings Pitch 0 08 100 Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts Notes 10 is the factory default setting e Pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters per inch cpi Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0 01 cpi increments For nonscalable monospaced fonts the pitch appears on the display but it cannot be changed PCL Emulation Settings Orientation Portrait Landscape Specify the orien
89. DDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting View or change the current mDNS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting View or change the current DNS server address Backup DNS Server Address Backup DNS Server Address 2 View or change the backup DNS server addresses Backup DNS Server Address 3 Enable HTTPS Yes No View or change the current HTTPS setting Note Yes is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 202 IPv6 menu To access the menu navigate to any of the following e Network Ports menu gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt IPv6 e Network Ports menu gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt IPv6 Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers Use To Enable IPv6 Enable IPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off Auto Configuration Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 On address configuration entries provided by a router Off Note On is the factory default setting Set Hostname Set the host name View Address Note These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server View Router Address Enable DHCPv6 Enable DHCPv6 in the printer On Note On is the factory default setting Off XX S Wireless menu Note This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or prin
90. Depending on your printer model navigate to either of the following gt Settings gt OK gt Networks Ports gt OK gt Network x gt OK gt Network x Setup gt OK gt Wireless gt OK gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt OK gt Start Push Button Method e A gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start Push Button Method gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start Push Button Method 2 Follow the instructions on the printer display Using the Personal Identification Number PIN method 1 Depending on your printer model navigate to either of the following gt Settings gt OK gt Networks Ports gt OK gt Network x gt OK gt Network x Setup gt OK gt Wireless gt OK gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt OK gt Start PIN Method e gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Protected Setup gt Start PIN Method 2 Copy the eight digit WPS PIN 3 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field Notes e The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server
91. Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address From the top left corner of the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field 3 Press Enter Note If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly Using MS812de 135 Customizing the home screen 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123
92. IP address information Note This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers Network x Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address information Notes This menu item is available only when more than one network option is installed This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers connected to print servers Naaa Understanding the printer menus 198 Use To Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer Note This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in PCL Fonts the printer PostScript Fonts Note A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or printer hard disk Notes e Job Buffer Size must be set to 100 e Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working properly This menu item appears only when an optional flash drive or printer hard disk is installed Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information such as serial number and model name Network Ports menu Active NIC menu Active NIC Allow the printer to connect to a network Auto Notes list of available
93. Index factory defaults restoring 76 FCC notices 343 345 348 349 finding more information about the printer 7 finding printer IP address 87 134 finisher finishing features 182 supported paper sizes 182 finisher features 182 Finishing menu 229 firmware card 11 flash drive printing from 66 113 161 flash drives supported file types 67 114 162 font sample list printing 70 116 164 Forms and Favorites setting up 89 136 G General Settings menu 215 green settings Eco Mode 74 120 168 Hibernate mode 76 122 170 Quiet mode 75 121 169 H hardware options adding print driver 34 held jobs 68 115 163 printing from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 printing from Windows 69 116 164 Help menu 241 Hibernate mode using 76 122 170 hiding icons on the home screen 88 135 hole punch box emptying 256 Home button printer control panel 42 83 129 home screen buttons understanding 84 130 customizing 88 135 hiding icons 88 135 showing icons 88 135 home screen applications configuring 88 135 finding information 88 135 home screen buttons understanding 84 130 HTML menu 240 l icons on the home screen hiding 88 135 showing 88 135 Image menu 241 imaging unit ordering 247 Imaging unit low 84 xy 285 Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy 285 Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy 285 importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server 90 137 Incompatible output bin x 5
94. Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Step 4 Go to step 5 Manually add the tray Check if the tray is available in the printer driver in the printer driver Note You may need to manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 34 Is the tray available in the printer driver Step 5 The problem is solved Contact customer Check if the tray is selected support From the application you are using select the tray If you are using Mac OS X version 9 then make sure the printer is set up in Chooser Does the tray operate properly Troubleshooting Cannot detect internal option Action Step 1 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn on the printer Does the internal option operate correctly Yes The problem is solved 310 No Go to step 2 Step 2 Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board a Turnoffthe printer using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet b Make sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector in the controller board c Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board Step 3 Print a
95. LEXMARK MS810 Series User s Guide Important Click here before using this guide October 2014 Machine type s 4063 Model s 210 230 23E 410 430 630 63E www lexmark com Contents 2 Contents Safety information ssssssssosseseossesecsessssossesecsssseossssesossesecsesssessssesosssseeses D OvervieW ssssssscssesscsssssosoosecseescsosossccesssosssesesccsoossosessescescoseccessssossoscsesessese USING THIS Ao e E E EA A 7 Finding information about the Printer cccccssssscccccceceecescesssnssueseececceeccsssesseusaeeseeseeesesseseeneneseseseesnes 7 Selecting a location for the DVI Cl ca cscncsvedenencenpasvenancnceaspanccevaniowssaneemwocsvenaey Additional printer setup ssssssssssssesosessecssssseossoseoseosessesoseesessesseosssssesss LI Installing internal OPTIONS iss n sessiersdscsavasecentlerecaasaunsicuesvondaedseaveewcustuptas aa anaa Eea a o aaae 11 Installing hardware OPtiONs ccccccccsssssssseceeccescessesnsnseeeceecessessesseseeeeeeseuseesaueesescesesesesesseseauausaeeeeeeeeees 28 Attaching Cables vis csscsewrcncedsaesseeidn senceceaassiavedevamaneetedsdlesaeaessaedduawenauedsbessasvens vu e a a aoi aa 32 Setting Up the printer SOWA sa scieccds cc cassiensevcds a sanded apecedeveasscadeucabdersdeahavsndioecsadaareeodde 34 NO CWOIKIN Bicsseesnss cess ceesiannscnedsie cdeaeveaaen siasedsevasavgecssducenetasausnsevaduntaiiasnesdsslonadalanccoesaslwexaaunedavyevansstue
96. P Address Hostname Contact Name Location Zero Configuration Name Custom Text 1 Select Custom Home Messages on the printer display Note This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus 225 Export Configuration Package Export the printer configuration package to a flash drive Export Note The configuration package cannot be exported unless a flash drive is attached to the printer Flash Drive Menu Print Settings menu Use To Copies Specify a default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Paper Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Note Tray 1 is the factory default setting Multipurpose Feeder MP Feeder Manual Paper Manual Envelope Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 2 3 1 2 3 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 Sides Duplex Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page 1 sided Note 1 sided is the factory default setting 2 sided Staple Specify whether prints are stapled Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e On allows the printer to staple print jobs e This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Hole Punch Specify whether prints have holes for binding Off Notes On e Off is the factory default setting e This menu appea
97. P IP host name Note This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server Understanding the printer menus 201 Use aI IP Address View or change the current TCP IP address Note Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP Netmask View or change the current TCP IP netmask Gateway View or change the current TCP IP gateway Enable DHCP Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable RARP Specify the RARP address assignment setting On Note Off is the factory default setting Off Enable BOOTP Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting On Note On is the factory default setting Off Enable AutolP Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Enable FTP TFTP Enable the built in FTP server which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer Yes Protocol No Note Yes is the factory default setting Enable HTTP Server Enable the built in Web server Embedded Web Server When enabled the printer Yes can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser No Note Yes is the factory default setting WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address Enable DDNS Yes No Enable mDNS Yes No DNS Server Address View or change the current
98. Power modes e Using the Sleep Hibernate button Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between one hour and one month Off mode If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power then to completely stop product power consumption disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet Total energy usage It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode s energy usage Modular component notice This product may contain the following modular component s Lexmark Regulatory Type LEX M01 005 FCC ID lYLLEXM01005 Industry Canada IC 2376A M01005 Notices 341 Patent acknowledgment The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography ECC Cipher Suites for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Prope
99. ROBE MELTNET CORBIS DIA A RRM ECT COREE RERR CRASS CBRE SHOT CEMHVES COMBIMSHAAMBISMR aT SKIBRENSCEMBVET VCCI A CORB TIZAMMRMNRE CT CORB RR CREAT DCB RBS ESSEC CEMHVET COMBI PY BIS WHR ET SEDBRENSCEPHWVET VCCI A European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Radio interference notice Warning This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024 This product is not intended to be used in residential domestic environments This is a Class A product
100. Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear XR Contact customer support at http support lexmar k com or your service representative The problem is solved Troubleshooting Print is too dark N ABC DEF Action Step 1 a From the Quality menu on the printer control panel reduce the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Step 2 a From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 321 No The problem is solved Do one or more of the following e Specify the paper type texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper type texture and weight specified in the tray settings The problem is solved Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper ss Se From t
101. S812de Hibernate The product is in a low level energy saving mode Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet but the 0 1 power switch is turned off The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time averaged measurements Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average Notices 340 Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Sleep Mode This product is designed with an energy saving mode called Sleep Mode The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time called the Sleep Mode Timeout Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product in minutes 20 By using the configuration menus the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption but may increase the response time of the product Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response but uses more energy Hibernate Mode This product is designed with an ultra low power operating mode called Hibernate mode When operating in Hibernate Mode all other systems and devices are powered down safely The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods e Using the Hibernate Timeout e Using the Schedule
102. Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires user intervention For each alarm type select from the following options Off Single Continuous Notes e Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control Single sounds three quick beeps e Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm Off means no alarm will sound Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds Print with Display Off Allow printing with display off Display on when printing Timeouts Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer Standby Mode enters a lower power state Disabled Notes 1 240 Standby Mode appears only in touch screen printer models 15 is the factory default setting Timeouts Set the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before Sleep Mode it goes into a reduced power state Disabled Notes 1 120 20 is the factory default setting Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off Lower settings conserve more energy but may require longer warm up times e Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use Under most circumstances this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm up time Timeouts Allow the printer to print even when the display is off Note Display on when printing is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Hibernate Timeout Disabled 2
103. Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Vinyl Labels Texture Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Bond Texture Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Rough is the factory default setting Normal Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Envelope Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Letterhead Texture Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Understanding the printer menus Use Preprinted Texture To Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray 191 Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Colored Texture Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Light Texture Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rou
104. Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Envelope Weight Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded Heavy Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Letterhead Weight Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Preprinted Weight Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Colored Weight Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Light Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light Light Heavy Weight Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy Heavy Rough Cotton Weight Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Understanding the printer menus Custom x Weight Light Normal Heavy Paper Loading menu Use Card Stock Loading Duplex off 193 Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded e Normal is the factory default setting e The options appear only when the custom type is supported Le Determine and set two
105. Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process e Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces e Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements latex inks might not Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities This determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality e When in doubt contact your paper supplier Using recycled paper and other office papers As an environmentally conscientious company Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser electrophotographic printers While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole including the following e Amount of post consumer waste Lexmark tests up to 100 post consumer waste content e Temperature and humidity conditions Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world e Moisture content Business papers should have low moisture 4 5 Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer e Th
106. WROD MWA LTS ES VCCI B Notices 345 European Community EC directives conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 2009 125 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits the ecodesign of energy related products and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Regulatory notices for wireless products This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters for example but not limited to wireless network cards or proximity card readers Exposure to radio frequency radiation The radiated output power
107. YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port ENA Gateway Set the gateway information for an external print server YYY YYY YYY YYY Note This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Note This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed Understanding the printer menus 208 Use To PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a serial port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e Onis the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On
108. ad the Web page correctly 2 Click the Copy Printer Settings Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 73 3 To change the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields Note If you want to add or remove a target printer then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed correctly Note If you have not changed any menu settings then the menu settings page lists all the factory default settings When you select and save other settings from the menus they replace the factory default settings as user default settings A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again choose another value and save it From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Reports gt OK gt Menu Settings Page gt OK Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Reports gt OK gt Network Setup Page gt OK
109. aks on a page 331 troubleshooting printer options 2100 sheet tray problems 309 internal option is not detected 310 internal print server 310 Internal Solutions Port 311 tray problems 311 USB parallel interface card 312 troubleshooting printing printing slows down 307 U understanding the home screen 84 130 uneven print density 331 Unformatted flash detected 53 298 Universal Paper Size setting 91 Universal paper size setting 43 138 Universal Setup menu 195 unlinking trays 63 110 111 158 159 Unsupported disk 298 Unsupported option in slot x 55 299 Unsupported USB hub please remove 285 USB port 32 printer control panel 42 83 129 USB port x disabled 56 299 USB parallel interface card troubleshooting 312 User s Guide using 7 using Forms and Favorites 111 159 using Hibernate mode 76 122 170 using Quiet mode 169 using recycled paper 243 using the printer control panel 42 83 129 361 using the touch screen buttons 86 131 Utilities menu 234 V verify print jobs 68 115 163 printing from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 printing from Windows 69 116 164 verifying printer setup 39 vertical voids appear 331 virtual display checking using Embedded Web Server 117 165 voids appear 331 volatile memory 77 123 171 erasing 78 124 172 volatility statement of 77 123 171 W wiping printer hard disk 79 wiping the printer hard disk 125 173 Wireless menu 202 wireless network configu
110. al Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vid grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z z
111. alge debuedovaeedwedakaderceanessebadvusatersacdabgueadecneniess 243 REG CHIN garenera a a pean ae a Sea daa tud oa ath Need Seeds bes HT a ae eis 244 Maintaining the printer cscccsscsssscsssccsscccsscsssccssscssccessscsssssssesssesses2G0 OPCS iMG Supplies a a NIN Nahi oes Sela Aa es na Td TT a 246 SUOMING SUP PIES sc caveccvsasss chs oie a sda suse acualsesasuedes evansabecehevecevy sus dauaveasssasucunveusuaussaisssvabensvsntia lees 249 Replacing SUDPIIES iseni a eds iuealexcuancskdsodbvcesbanss aeasdaadededss sa bawhvate a a a Eh 249 Cleaning printerpartS eisndiepsn e a T A aE E E T I ATENE 255 MOVING tHE PRINTS e E E EEE E EE EA AS 257 Clearing JAIMS sazecsccowerscscsevacecwennsunnsesdvenccaseasacdccssendsveedsccesduanteariiectseenstorsiies ZOU AV OIG ING AIMS sass 2 Se 5 E E EA E wesacedabacdesdecdscuguzsaetuadecege E E tice teadel RTAS 260 Understanding jam messages and lOCations ccsssssssssssceceeeceecesessssnsnseseeceeceesessesesesauseseseeeeeesssssenees 262 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 2OO 201 ceceeseesssssnsnceseececeeeceeeesesesessesnnaes 264 x page jam open upper rear door 202 cccccesesssssssssneececeececeececescesesuseseusaeaeeceseeeeseseesessesseeeenans 266 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 cccccssccccccececesseseessensneaeaeeececeeeeesesesessnenes 267 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 c cccccccccscssssss
112. ally restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Set the size of the network input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel serial and USB buffers The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing This menu only appears when a formatted disk is installed Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the control panel The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Note Auto is the factory default setting Standard Network Setup OR Network x Setup Reports Network Card TCP IP IPv6 Wireless AppleTalk Show and set the printer network settings Note The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Understanding the printer menus 200 Reports menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup
113. any number between 1 and 12 if the appropriate optional bins are installed Understanding the printer menus 197 Assign Type Bin Select a bin for each supported paper type Plain Paper Bin For each type select the following options Card Stock Bin Disabled Transparency Bin Standard Bin Recycled Bin Bin x Labels Bin Notes Vinyl Labels Bin Bond Bin Disabled is the factory default setting Envelope Bin e x can be any number between 1 and 12 if the Rough Envelope Bin appropriate optional bins are installed Letterhead Bin e If multiple bins are assigned the same name then the Preprinted Bin name only appears once in the bin list Colored Bin Light Paper Bin Heavy Paper Bin Rough Cotton Bin Custom x Bin Reports menu Reports menu Use To Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays installed memory total page count alarms timeouts printer control panel language TCP IP address status of supplies status of the network connection and other information Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly Note This menu appears only if an optional staple finisher is installed Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP
114. ard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Using MS812de 174 Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes Do not turn off the printer during th
115. aring the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2009 125 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the ecodesign of energy related products Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950 1 Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below Notices 347 Cesky Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje Ze v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt over
116. ark is located For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer see Finding the IP address of the computer on page 87 e Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located 4 Click Apply To use the application touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen and then navigate through form categories or search for forms based on a form number name or description Understanding Eco Settings To Manage energy consumption noise toner and paper usage settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer Using MS812de 137 Exporting and importing a configuration You can export configuration settings into a text file and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 To export or import a configuration for one application do the following a Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management b From the list of installed applications click the name of the application you want to configure c Click Configure and then do either of the following e To export a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file Not
117. arrant uninterrupted or error free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product Notices 343 Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by Modification or unauthorized attachments Accidents misuse abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user s guides manuals instructions or guidance Unsuitable physical or operating environment Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications Refurbishment repair refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products supplies or parts Products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD ALL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS PRICES AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE Limitation
118. art until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed e The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer will ignore the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer Na 4 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power operating mode Notes Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode e Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode e Ifthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button menu select Hibernate and then touch Submit Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For more informa
119. artridges 245 reducing noise 75 121 reducing printer noise 169 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 293 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 294 remote control panel using Embedded Web Server 71 Remote Operator Panel setting up 90 137 Remove defective disk 61 294 Remove packaging material area name 294 Remove paper from linked set bin name 294 Remove paper from all bins 294 Remove paper from bin x 294 Remove paper from standard output bin 294 removing printer hard disk 26 repeat print jobs 68 115 163 printing from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 printing from Windows 69 116 164 repeating defects appear on prints 325 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 295 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 295 Replace imaging unit 0 estimated pages remain 84 xy 295 Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy 295 Replace missing or unresponsive fuser 31 xy 293 Replace roller kit 81 xx 296 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 296 Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy 296 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 296 Index replacing a staple cartridge 254 replacing supplies staple cartridge 254 replacing the toner cartridge 249 251 Reports menu 197 reserve print jobs 68 163 printing from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 printing from Windows 69 116 164 Restore held jobs 296 restoring factory default settings 122 170 roller
120. artridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser DANGER Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du d verrouillage des loquets Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser VAARA N kym t nt lasers teily on varottava kun v rikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki V lt lasers teelle altistumista GEFAHR Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre Laserstrahl meiden KINAYNOS EkAvon adopatns akt vo oiia laser Kata tnv adaipEon twv KACETWV Kar THV anaop ion THs HavSdAWOns Anope yete tnv EkBEON otnv aktwo o ia laser VESZ LY Nem l that l zersugarzas fordulhat el a patronok elt vol t sakor s a zardszerkezet felbont sakor Keriilje a l zersug rnak val kitetts get PERICOLO Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco Evitare l esposizione al raggio laser FARE Usynlig laserstraling nar kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill Unng eksponering for laserstralen NIEBEZPIECZE STWO niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady Nale y unika na wietlenia promieniem lasera ONACHO Hesugumoe na3epHoe n3nyyeHne Npr N3BNEYEHHbIX KapTPUAYKAX n CHATUN 6noknpoBkKn V36eralite BO3Ae CTBNA NazepHbIx Nyye Pozor Nebezpe enstvo nevidite n ho laserov ho iarenia pri odobrat ch kazet ch a odblokova
121. asadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Index Index Numerics 2100 sheet tray loading 51 98 146 550 sheet tray installing 29 Symbols x page jam clear manual feeder 250 272 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 264 x page jam open tray x 24x 271 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 267 x page jam open upper rear door 202 266 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx 278 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 277 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 280 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in b
122. atically switch to PS emulation when a print job received On through a USB port requires it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes e On is the factory default setting e When set to Off the printer does not examine incoming data The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional On communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Off Notes Auto e Auto is the factory default setting Auto sets the printer to examine data determine the format and then process it appropriately The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated USB Buffer Set the size of the USB input buffer Disabled Notes Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes e The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1 K increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer disable or reduce the size of the parallel ser
123. atus of parts and supplies 73 120 168 checking the status of parts and supplies 73 120 168 checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 117 165 checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 165 cleaning exterior of the printer 255 cleaning the printer 255 Close door or insert cartridge 283 Close rear door 284 Complex page some data may not have printed 39 284 compressed images appear on prints 316 confidential data information on securing 80 126 174 confidential jobs modifying print settings 72 118 166 confidential print jobs 68 115 163 printing from a Macintosh computer 69 116 164 printing from Windows 69 116 164 Confidential Print menu 212 Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 284 configuration information wireless network 36 configurations printer 40 81 127 Configure MP menu 189 configuring multiple printers 72 119 167 supply notifications imaging unit 71 118 166 supply notifications maintenance kit 71 118 166 supply notifications toner cartridge 71 118 166 Index configuring supply notifications 118 166 configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server 71 connecting to a wireless network using PBC Push Button Configuration method 37 using PIN Personal Identification Number method 37 using the Embedded Web Server 38 using wireless setup wizard 37 conservation settings brightness adjusting 243 conserving supplies 244 Ec
124. base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration Amaximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel 1 Display e View the status of the printer Set up and operate the printer 2 Home button Go to the home screen 3 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode Press and release the Sleep button Touch the screen or press any hard button e Open a tray cover or door Send a print job from the computer e Perform a power on reset with the main power switch e Attach a device to a USB port Enter numbers letters or symbols on the printer Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity 6 Indicator light Check the status of the printer Using MS812de 130 Use the T o 7 USB port Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Indicator light Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer
125. ber of data bits sent in each transmission frame 7 8 Note 8 is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 210 Use To Parity Set the parity for serial input and output data frames Even Note None is the factory default setting Odd None Ignore Honor DSR Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing SMTP Setup menu Use Ae Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information Primary SMTP Gateway Port Note 25 is the default SMTP gateway port Secondary SMTP Gateway Secondary SMTP Gateway Port SMTP Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to 5 30 send an e mail Note 30 is the factory default setting Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e mail sent by the printer Use SSL Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the Disabled SMTP server Negotiate Notes Required Disabled is the factory default setting e When the Negotiate setting is used the SMTP server determines if SSL will be u
126. by a switch or breaker reset the breaker Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker Step 7 Connect the printer Go to step 8 Step 8 Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer and the other to the computer print server option or other network device Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Go to step 9 Connect the printer cable securely to the printer and the computer print server option or other network device Step 9 Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing material Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material removed Go to step 10 Turn off the printer remove all packing materials then reinstall the hardware options and then turn on the printer Troubleshooting Action Step 10 Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver Are the port settings correct Step 11 Check the installed printer driver Is the correct printer driver installed Yes Go to step 11 Go to step 12 301 No Use correct printer driver settings Install the correct printer driver Step 12 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Is the printer working The problem is solved Contact customer s
127. cartridge and then close all doors and covers Troubleshooting 284 Close rear door Close the rear door of the printer Complex page some data may not have printed 39 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the current print job For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Install additional printer memory Configuration change some held jobs were not restored 57 Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer e The printer firmware has been updated e The tray for the print job is removed The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port e The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer model From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Defective flash detected 51 Try one or more of the following Replace the defective flash memory card From the printer control panel select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the current print job Disk must be formatted for use in this device From the printer control panel
128. ce in flash memory for resources 52 291 notices 336 337 338 339 340 341 343 344 345 346 348 349 350 351 number of remaining pages estimate 246 0 optional 250 sheet tray loading 44 91 139 optional 550 sheet tray loading 44 91 139 optional card installing 21 options 550 sheet tray installing 29 firmware cards 11 Internal Solutions Port installing 16 memory card 11 15 printer hard disk installing 22 printer hard disk removing 26 Index ordering imaging unit 247 maintenance kit 248 roller kit 248 staple cartridges 248 ordering supplies toner cartridges 246 P paper characteristics 176 letterhead 178 preprinted forms 178 recycled 178 selecting 177 setting size 43 setting type 43 storing 176 179 unacceptable 178 Universal size setting 43 91 138 using recycled 243 Paper changes needed 292 paper characteristics 176 paper feed troubleshooting message remains after jam is cleared 314 paper jams avoiding 260 paper jams clearing behind rear door 266 267 in duplex area 270 in finisher rear door 277 in multipurpose feeder 272 in rear expander door 278 in rear mailbox door 280 in standard bin 270 in staple finisher 273 in the tray 271 inside the printer 264 Paper Loading menu 193 paper size setting 91 138 Paper Size Type menu 186 paper sizes supported 180 Paper Texture menu 190 paper type setting 91 138 paper types supported 180 Paper Weight menu 191 paper weights supporte
129. ch the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the Print dialog and pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt Print Settings gt OK gt Quality Menu gt OK gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the toner darkness and then press oK Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 66 Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to enter t
130. ches the region number of the printer x indicates the value of the printer region y indicates the value of the cartridge region x and y can have the following values List of printer and toner cartridge regions Region number Region 0 Global United States Canada European Economic Area EEA Switzerland Asia Pacific Australia New Zealand Latin America Africa Middle East rest of Europe Invalid oly mI RB wITnitr Notes The x and y values are the xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel e The x and y values must match for printing to continue Replace imaging unit 0 estimated pages remain 84 xy Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy The printer is scheduled for maintenance For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com or contact your service representative and then report the message Troubleshooting 296 Replace roller kit 81 xx 1 Replace the roller kit For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the part 2 Press OK to clear the mes
131. cific legal rights You may also have other rights that vary from state to state Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Notices 344 The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult your point of purchase or
132. city output finisher expander x x A5 J vV V ve JIS B5 V V V2 V2 Executive V V V2 V2 Letter V V V V i v vV v v Legal V v V 3 Folio J y J J Oficio V V V V Statement V V V v Universal J J V VEZ Envelopes X vV X X 1 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first 2 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it 3 The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it 4 The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm 8 27 in to 217 mm 8 54 in j lt Paper and specialty media guide Supported paper types and weights 183 Paper type Paper weight 4 bin mailbox Output expander Staple finisher Staple hole punch and high capacity finisher output expander Plain Paper 90 176 g m x J x 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v v Card Stock 163 g m x J J 1 90 Ib index 199 g m E J x 110 Ib index Transparency 146 g m x g J 39 Ib bond Recycled 90 176 g m X J X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v Paper labels 180 g m x J x 48 Ib bond Dual web and 180 g m X X Integrated 48 Ib bond v Bond 90 176 g m g m x J X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond Envelope 1 2 p 05 g m x J X 28 Ib bond Rough Envelope 2 g p 105 g m X J X 28 Ib bond Letterhead A 90 176 g m x J X X 24 47 Ib bond 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib bond v v v
133. conditions such as Imaging unit loworCartridge Low Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them 7 Status Supplies e Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing e View more information on the printer warning or message and on how to clear it 8 Tips Open a context sensitive Help information on the printer control panel Features Feature Description Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears A Printer IP address Example 123 123 123 123 The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen icons and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Using MS812de 1 Left arrow 4 Menus gt Paper Menu Default Source 4 Tray 1 Paper Size Type Configure MP a Cassette Substitute Size a Statement A5 Paper Texture Scroll to the left 2 Rig
134. controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard diskis designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances e The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 78 The printer is being removed from your premises for service e The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models
135. ct customer support Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified bin For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Reattach bins x y Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on e Reattach the specified bins 1 Turn off the printer Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Remove the specified bins Reattach the bins uu AeA WwW N Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the specified bins 4 Contact customer support Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified bins For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy Try one or more of the following e Check if the toner cartridge is missing If missing install the toner cartridge For information on installing the cartridge see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide e ifthe toner cartridge is installed then remove the unresponsive toner cartridge and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the cartridge is defective Replace the toner cartridge Reinstall missing or unresponsive fuser 31
136. d 180 Parallel x menu 205 Parallel port x disabled 56 292 parts checking status 73 120 168 checking from printer control panel 120 checking on the printer control panel 168 checking using the Embedded Web Server 73 120 168 using genuine Lexmark 246 parts and supplies status of checking on printer control panel 73 PCL Emul menu 235 PDF menu 235 Personal Identification Number method using 37 PostScript menu 235 PPDS font error 50 292 PPDS menu 238 preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network 35 print driver hardware options adding 34 print irregularities 320 print job canceling from the printer control panel 70 canceling from computer 70 117 165 print quality troubleshooting blank pages 323 characters have jagged edges 314 clipped pages or images 315 compressed images appear on prints 316 gray background on prints 316 horizontal voids appear on prints 317 print irregularities 320 print is too dark 321 print is too light 322 printer is printing solid black pages 324 repeating defects appear on prints 325 shadow images appear on prints 326 357 skewed print 326 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 327 streaked vertical lines 328 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 329 toner rubs off 330 toner specks appear on prints 330 transparency print quality is poor 331 uneven print density 331 white streaks 331 Print Settings menu 225 print troubleshooting envelope seals w
137. d feeders Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality defects and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality Understanding the printer menus 242 Menu item Description Menu Map Provides a list of the control panel menus and settings Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally USB or to a network Moving Guide Provides instructions for safely moving the printer Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies Saving money and the environment 243 Saving money and the environment Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment We design with the environment in mind engineer our packaging to reduce materials and provide collection and recycling programs For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle By selecting certain printer settings or tasks you may be able to reduce your printer s impact even further This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit Adjusting the brightness of the printer display To save energy or
138. d in any way Have windows holes perforations cutouts or embossing Have metal clasps string ties or folding bars Have an interlocking design Have postage stamps attached Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position Paper and specialty media guide 176 Have bent corners Have rough cockle or laid finishes Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes Before loading the envelopes on the tray flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note A combination of high humidity over 60 and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes Tips on using labels From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels loaded in the tray Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities For more information on label printing characteristics and design see the Card Stock amp Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com Use labels designed specifically for laser printers Do not use labels with slick backing material Do not use labels with exposed adhesive Use full label sheets Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing resulting in a jam Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive and could void the p
139. d in later editions Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time References in this publication to products programs or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates Any reference to a product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products programs or services except those expressly designated by the manufacturer are the user s responsibility For Lexmark technical support visit http support lexmark com For information on supplies and downloads visit www lexmark com 2014 Lexmark International Inc All rights reserved GOVERNMENT END USERS The Software Program and any related documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7207 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U S Government end users a only as Commercial Item
140. d using an unsecured wireless network Notes If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to then launch the wireless utility of the computer network adapter and then look for the network name If you cannot find the SSID or the security information for your network then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact your system support person To find the WPA WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network see the documentation that came with the access point see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point or consult your system support person Additional printer setup 37 Connecting the printer to a network using the Wireless Setup Wizard Before you begin make sure that e A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter The Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer e Active NIC is set to Auto To set this to Auto navigate to one of the following gt Settings gt OK gt Network Ports gt OK gt Active NIC gt OK gt Auto gt OK gt Network Ports gt Active NIC gt Auto gt Network Ports gt Active NIC gt Auto gt Submit Note Make sure to turn off the printer then wait for at least five seconds and then turn on the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate
141. dded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes e Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit e All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some supply conditions 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Supply Notifications 3 From the drop down menu for each supply select one of the following notification options Notification Description Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs E mail Only The printer generates an e mail when the supply condition is reached The status of the supply appears on the menus page and status page Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e mail about the status of the s
142. dels press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints from the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it feeds from that tray If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper then it prints f
143. e 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Eco Mode 3 Select a setting Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings e Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity e The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode e Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 75 Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce the printer noise 1 From
144. e File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options pop up menus adjust the settings if necessary Note To print on a specific paper type adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded or select the appropriate tray or feeder 3 Click Print Adjusting toner darkness 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 3 Adjust the toner darkness and then click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt Print Settings gt Quality Menu gt Toner Darkness 2 Adjust the setting and then touch Submit Using MS812de 161 Printing from a flash drive or mobile device Printing from a flash drive Notes Before printing an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted
145. e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter any connector the memory device or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur Using MS812de 162 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing and then touch Print Notes e Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Supported flash drives and file types Notes e High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported e USB flash drives must support the
146. e and time in YYYY MM DD HH MM format Understanding the printer menus 215 Use To Time Zone Select the time zone list of time zones Note GMT is the factory default setting Automatically observe DST Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time DST start and end times On associated with the printer Time Zone setting Off Note On is the factory default setting Enable NTP Enable Network Time Protocol which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a On network Off Notes On is the factory default setting e The setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time Settings menu General Settings menu Display Language Set the language of the text that appears on the printer display English Note Not all languages are available for all printer models Francais Deutsch Italiano Espanol Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Portuguese Suomi Russian Polski Greek Magyar Turkce Cesky Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Korean Japanese Understanding the printer menus 216 Show Supply Estimates Get an estimate on the status of supplies Show estimates Notes Do not show estimates e Show estimates displays the estimated supply status in pages on the control panel printer Web page and on the Menu Settings and the Device Statistics reports Do not show estimates hides the estimated supply status in any location Eco Mode Minimize t
147. e encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page You can also see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide for additional information 1 Go to www lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads gt select your printer 2 Click the Manuals tab and then select Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide Paper and specialty media guide 175 Paper and specialty media guide Notes e Make sure that the paper size type and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel e Flex fan and straighten specialty media before loading them The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser e For more information on card stock and labels see the Card Stock amp Labe
148. e for those print jobs does not change to the new default value e If the printer is turned off then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are deleted Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification Reserve Job Expiration Off 1 hour 4 hours 24 hours 1 week Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time Note Off is the factory default setting Erase Temporary Data Files menu Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved such as downloaded fonts macros and held jobs Note This menu appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Wiping Mode Auto Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files Understanding the printer menus Use Automatic Method Single pass Multiple pass 214 To Mark all disk space used by a previous print job This method does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared Notes e Single pass is the factory default setting e Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time e Highly confidential information should be erased using o
149. e from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place 99 Using MS810de 100 ai Bs Loading A4 letter legal Oficio and Folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Using MS810de 101 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Put the AS length guide in its holder Using MS810de 102 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS810de One sided printing Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher One sided printing XR Two sided printing Two sided printing 103 e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of t
150. e imaging unit very soon For more information see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Incompatible output bin x 59 Try one or more of the following e Remove the indicated bin e Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified bin For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Troubleshooting 286 Incompatible tray x 59 Try one or more of the following Remove the specified tray From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 Note The paper source can be a tray or a feeder Try one or more of the following Load the correct size of paper in the paper source From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and print using a different paper source For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Check the length and width guides of the paper source and make sure the paper is loaded properly e Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog e Make sure the paper size and
151. e information see Printing a menu settings page on page 119 Using MS810de 123 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 124 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to A gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt ZS Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of n
152. e to ensure the best print performance e If you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper then you may use the MS710 Series printer models which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed For more information on the MS710 Series printer models contact your Lexmark sales representative From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Universal Setup gt OK gt Units of Measure gt OK gt select unit of measure gt OK Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes e When loading folio legal or Oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and pull it out completely e Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so may cause a jam n Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 45 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 46 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes e Lock the length guide for all paper s
153. e tray the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Mic Troubleshooting 328 Action Yes No Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints Step 5 Contact customer The problem is solved Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints XL J Streaked vertical lines appear on prints Leading edge i Saas ChE 7 Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints Step 2 Go to step
154. e tray until it clicks into place e Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down e Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer e Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Safety information 6 CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Make sure that all external connections such as Ethernet and telephone system connections are properly installed in their marked plug in ports This product is designed tested and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer s components The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not cut twist bind crush or p
155. eeianesonsede 35 Veritying printer SOUU Pies cioieessGsos525eices reached ptacsavientcchecesceasantesnaseseasacatheasevassbaweasaneseacaeusasaateueniaubialanuesantentee 39 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812d N e0eseee002 40 Learning about The priteni Re E Ee EE cats E E E E E E E 40 Loading paper and specialty MeCia cccesssssssscececeecesessnsnsaeececeeceesesesessueeseeessuseeeseeuseseeeeseseesseeeseeeees 43 E E AE E A A P A E A T E E P A A E E T 64 Managing your printers sie ccchncecatesiecbnacecasbadacatacauaeinandceeocguesnanaseeoanesladinaaasdassucadiansideeseseladioamaaes E RNEER 71 Using MS810de seosesessesessesecsessssscesesesecsecsesscsesessesecsecsscsesesseseesessesesssse BL Learning about the priDte eener aa e Ee aaa a aE a Shave E e a AE E E 81 Setting up and using the home screen applications ccssccccccceccsssssssseeeceeccesessessaeeeecceeessesssnssseeesesess 87 Loading paper and specialty Meia ccecsssssssscceceeceecesnsnsaeececeeceesesseessueeseeesseseesssensesseseseseesseeeseeeee 91 PHU E ia E AEEA AN 111 Managing your printe cserinirrsssriniia asri rinii EEEREN EAEN ERENER AA ERN AR 117 Using MS812de esesseseosesessssessesecsessssesecsecsosessssssesseseosesessesessessesesssss L27 Learning about theptiNte reserare ea a a aE aa EE p E 127 Setting up and using the home screen applications ccsscscccccccescssesssseceeceescesessssnseeseeceesessessn
156. ensitive information Notes e Help is automatically installed with the printer software The printer software is located in the printer program folder or on the desktop depending on your operating system The latest supplemental information updates and customer support e Documentation Driver downloads e Live chat support E mail support e Voice support Warranty information Lexmark support Web site http support lexmark com Note Select your country or region and then select your product to view the appropriate support site Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer Record the following information located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer and have it ready when you contact customer support so that they may serve you faster e Machine Type number e Serial number Date purchased Store where purchased Warranty information varies by country or region Inthe U S See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer or go to http support lexmark com In other countries and regions See the printed warranty that came with this printer Selecting a location for the printer 9 Selecting a location for the printer A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two
157. er Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser Preprinted papers that require a registration the precise location on the page greater than 2 3 mm 0 9 in such as optical character recognition OCR forms In some cases registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms Coated papers erasable bond synthetic papers thermal papers Rough edged rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers Recycled papers that fail EN12281 2002 European testing Paper weighing less than 60 g m 16 Ib Multiple part forms or documents For more information about Lexmark visit www lexmark com General sustainability related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link Storing paper Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality For best results store paper where the temperature is 21 C 70 F and the relative humidity is 40 percent Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 24 C 65 75 F with relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent Store paper in cartons on a pallet or shelf rather than on the floor Store individual packages on a flat surface Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer The carton and wrapper help keep the paper clean dry and f
158. er control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e ifthe printer cannot find the requested font then from the printer control panel navigate to PPDS menu gt Best Fit gt On The printer will find a similar font and reformat the affected text e Cancel the current print job Paper changes needed Try one or more of the following Select Use current supplies on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Cancel the current print job Parallel port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following e Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm The printer discards any data received through the parallel port e Select Reset active bin to reset the bin for a linked set of bins Reattach bin x Try one or more of the following Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Reattach the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Reattach the bin 5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 6 Turn the printer back on Remove the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Troubleshooting 293 3 Remove the specified bin 4 Conta
159. er defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Notes e The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing e The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing e When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance e f you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper then you may use the MS710 Series printer models which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed For more information on the MS710 Series printer models contact your Lexmark sales representative 1 From the home screen navigate to A Paper Menu gt Universal Setup gt Units of Measure gt select a unit of measure 2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height 3 Select the width or height and then touch A Loading the 250 or 550 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray Notes e When loading folio legal or Oficio size paper lift the tray slightly and pull it out completely Using MS810de 92 e Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display Doing so
160. ernet cable and power cord neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer Additional printer setup Setting up the printer software Installing the printer 1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package 2 Run the installer and then follow the instructions on the computer screen 3 For Macintosh users add the printer Note Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu Adding available options in the print driver For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder In Windows 8 From the Search charm type run and then navigate to Run gt type control printers gt OK 34 Additional printer setup 35 In Windows 7 or earlier a Click or click Start and then click Run b Type control printers c Press Enter or click OK 2 Select the printer you want to update and then do either of the following e For Windows 7 or later select Printer properties e For earlier versions select Properties 3 Navigate to the Configuration tab and then select Update Now Ask Printer 4 Apply the changes For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer and then select Options amp Supplies 2 Navigate to the list of hardware options and then add any installed options 3 Apply the changes Networking Notes e Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless network For info
161. erver 333 Index checking an unresponsive printer 299 contacting customer support 334 solving basic printer problems 299 troubleshooting display printer display is blank 301 troubleshooting paper feed message remains after jam is cleared 314 troubleshooting print envelope seals when printing 302 error reading flash drive 302 held jobs do not print 301 incorrect characters print 303 incorrect margins on prints 318 jammed pages are not reprinted 313 job prints from wrong tray 303 job prints on wrong paper 303 jobs do not print 306 Large jobs do not collate 304 multiple language PDF files do not print 305 paper curl 319 paper frequently jams 313 print job takes longer than expected 305 tray linking does not work 307 unexpected page breaks occur 308 troubleshooting print quality blank pages 323 characters have jagged edges 314 clipped pages or images 315 compressed images appear on prints 316 gray background on prints 316 horizontal voids appear on prints 317 print irregularities 320 print is too dark 321 print is too light 322 printer is printing solid black pages 324 repeating defects appear on prints 325 shadow images appear on prints 326 skewed print 326 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 327 streaked vertical lines 328 toner fog or background shading appears on prints 329 toner rubs off 330 toner specks appear on prints 330 transparency print quality is poor 331 uneven print density 331 white stre
162. es When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved e To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly Ifa timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply 3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications do the following a Click Settings gt Import Export b Do either of the following e To export a configuration file click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file e To import a configuration file do the following 1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File gt Choose File and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer 2 Click Submit Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks 1 Open a Web browse
163. eseeseeseseseseeeness 333 CONnTActing CUSTOMEFSUP POM orein nE EE AAE NEEE E N eet 334 INGOUICES PE E EA E EEE AAE EASE E o Product imtormationsarmenane a a a a eed ss a oe TE 335 e ALOA ALONE E EAEE ere A AE E E A A E AE SE E AOE A 335 Fower CONSUMPTION hose ina e naai E NEN A N EEA AAE EAE AEE aAA EEEE AEA 339 WACO AEE E EE sate EE AE E E OS Safety information 5 Safety information Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not use this product with extension cords multioutlet power strips multioutlet extenders or other types of surge or UPS devices The power rating capacity of these types of accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance property damage or potential fire Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY This product uses a laser Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure This product uses a printing process that heats the print media and the heat may cause the media to release emissions You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The lithium
164. essary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to B gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Using MS812de 165 Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel touch Cancel Job or press J on the keypad 2 Touch the print job you want to cancel and then touch Delete Selected Jobs Note If you press on the keypad then touch Resume to return to the home screen Canceling a
165. exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Parallel Buffer Disabled Auto 3K to maximum size allowed Job Buffering Off On Auto Set the size of the parallel input buffer Notes e Auto is the factory default setting Disabled turns off job buffering Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes e The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1 KB increments e The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer the size of the other link buffers and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off e To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer disable or reduce the size of the USB serial and network buffers e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Advanced Status On Off Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port Notes e On is the
166. f this product is a feature or option this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended To obtain warranty service you may be required to present the feature or option with the product If you transfer this product to another user warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user Limited warranty service The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it or its original contents are substantially used up depleted or consumed Fuser Units Transfer Transport Units Paper Feed items if any and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a Life Warning or Scheduled Maintenance message for such item To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location You are responsible for loss of or damage to a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location When warranty service
167. figuration file do the following 1 Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File gt Choose File and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer 2 Click Submit Setting up Remote Operator Panel This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer you can view the printer status release held print jobs create bookmarks and do other print related tasks 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Remote Operator Panel Settings Using MS810de 91 3 Select the Enable check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 260 and Storing paper on page 179 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to Ee Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select the paper size or type gt ZS Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size is a us
168. following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch oS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam open upper rear door 202 CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clearing jams 267 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the rear door 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch Sf or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam open upper and lower rear door 231 234 A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching Clearing jams 268 1 Pull down the rear door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the rear door Clearing jams 269 4 Push the back of the standard tray 5 Press down the rear duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper out Note Make sure a
169. forms of non volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard diskis designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data X J Using MS812de 172 Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances e The printer is being decommissioned The printer hard disk is being replaced The printer is being moved to a different department or location The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization e The printer is being removed from your premises for service e The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically shreds the hard disk
170. fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name Using MS810de 111 3 Touch oS 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f
171. g Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Go to step 3 Go to step 4 Contact customer support Do one or more of the following e Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 316 Compressed images appear on prints Note Printing on letter size paper using a 220 volt fuser compresses images Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser type Note Use a 110 volt fuser for printing on letter size paper and a 220 volt fuser for printing on A4 size paper b Resend the print job Do compressed images still appear Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer a Replace the fuser For more information on installing the fuser see support the instruction sheet that came with the part b Resend the print job Do compressed images still appear X Gray background on prints Leading edge Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to
172. g an encrypted PDF file you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur Using MS810de 114 2 From the printer control panel touch the document you want to print 3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing and then touch Print Notes e Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then touch Held Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mobile Note Mobile printing applicat
173. g the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the Enable Disable screen 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page You can also see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide for additional information 1 Go to www lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads gt select your printer 2 Click the Manuals tab and then select Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide Using MS812de 127 Using MS812de Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model 4 3 Standard bin Printer control panel Multipurpose feeder hl win re Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a prin
174. g this method 4 Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears and then proceed with disk wiping Notes e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task e Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Navigate to Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 80 3 From the Disk Encryption menu select Enable Notes Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take from seve
175. gh Heavy Texture Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Rough Cotton Texture Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray Rough Note Rough is the factory default setting Custom x Texture Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Paper Weight menu Use L Plain Weight Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Card Stock Weight Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Transparency Weight Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Recycled Weight Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Understanding the printer menus 192 Use Labels Weight Light Normal Heavy Vinyl Labels Weight To Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded Note Normal is the factory default setting Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded Rough Envelope Weight Light Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Heavy Bond Weight
176. godny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Portugu s A Lexmark International Inc declara que este este produto est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Diretiva 1999 5 CE Slovensky Lexmark International Inc t mto vyhlasuje e tento produkt sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia smernice 1999 5 ES Notices 348 Slovensko Lexmark International Inc izjavlja da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Svenska H rmed intygar Lexmark International Inc att denna produkt st r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Model specific information The following information applies only to the MS812de printer model Federal Communications Commission FCC compliance information statement This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
177. gt Reports e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Reports Use ae Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings such as the TCP IP address Network Card menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt Network Card e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Network Card Use To View Card Status View the connection status of the wireless network adapter Connected Disconnected View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter Network Address View the network addresses UAA LAA Job Timeout Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled 0 10 225 seconds Notes e 90 seconds is the factory default setting e A setting value of 0 disables the timeout e fa value between 1 and 9 is selected then Invalid appears on the display and the value is not saved Banner Page Allow the printer to print a banner page Off Note Off is the factory default setting On TCP IP menu To access the menu navigate to either of the following e Network Ports gt Standard Network gt Standard Network Setup gt TCP IP e Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt TCP IP Note This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers Set Hostname Set the current TC
178. he file password from the printer control panel e You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions 1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port Notes e Aflash drive icon appears on the printer control panel and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed e If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention such as when a jam has occurred then the printer ignores the flash drive e If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs then Busy appears After these print jobs are processed you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively printing reading or writing from the memory device Loss of data can occur Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 67 2 From the printer control panel select the document you want to print 3 Press the left or right arrow button to specify the number of copies for printing and then press ok Notes e Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing e If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen then access held jobs from the printer control panel to print files from the flash drive Printing from a mobile device To download a compatible mobile printing application visit www lexmark com mob
179. he font setting 3 Press oK Note The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated Printing a directory list From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Reports gt OK gt Print Directory gt OK Note The Print Directory menu item appears only when an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel press xi 2 When a list of print jobs appears select the job to cancel and then press OK 3 Press to go back to the home screen Canceling a print job from the computer For Windows users 1 Open the printers folder and then select your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu navigate to your printer 2 From the print queue select the print job you want to cancel and then delete it Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 71 Managing your printer Finding advanced networking and administrator information This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server For more advanced system support tasks see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Access
180. he printer control panel change the texture settings in the Paper Texture menu to match the paper you are printing on Go to step 5 Troubleshooting Action Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Is the print still too dark Yes Go to step 6 322 No The problem is solved Step 6 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the print still too dark Print is too light Action Step 1 a Fromthe Quality menu on the printer control panel increase the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Contact customer support Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved No The problem is solved Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type texture and weight of the paper loaded Go to step 3 Change the paper type texture and weight to match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the print still too light Go to step 4 The problem is solved
181. he printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address in the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Press OK Printing Printing a document Printing a document 1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 65 For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog if necessary 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to mat
182. he problem is solved Go to step 2 Contact customer support a Go to step 2 Contact customer support Troubleshooting 309 Hardware and internal option problems 2100 sheet tray problems Action Yes No Step 1 The problem is solved Go to step 2 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type Check if the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged b Insert the tray properly Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray Does the tray operate properly Step 2 The problem is solved Go to step 3 Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn it back on Does the tray operate properly Step 3 Go to step 4 For more information see the setup sheet that came with the 2100 sheet tray Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list Note If the tray is listed in the menu settings page but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray then it may not be properly installed
183. he tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Ses One sided printing Two sided printing i Using MS810de e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray 104 Using MS810de 105 6 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing a Using MS810de 106 2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides Using MS810de 107 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading e Flexsheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be carefu
184. he use of energy paper or specialty media Off Notes Energy Energy Paper e For touch screen printer models touch Eco Mode and then select from the options Paper e Off is the factory default setting Off resets the printer to its factory default settings e Energy minimizes the power used by the printer Performance may be affected but print quality is not Energy Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job Performance may be affected but print quality is not Quiet Mode Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer Off Notes On For touch screen printer models touch Quiet Mode and then select from the options e Off is the factory default setting This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible This setting is best suited for printing text and line art Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing Run Initial setup Instruct the printer to run the setup wizard Yes No Notes e Yes is the factory default setting e After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen the default becomes No Understanding the printer menus Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadie
185. head loading 2100 sheet tray 51 98 146 loading multipurpose feeder 58 105 153 loading trays 44 91 139 linking trays 63 110 111 158 159 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 288 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 289 Index Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 289 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 289 Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation 289 Load manual feeder with custom type name paper orientation 290 Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation 290 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 290 Load staples 288 loading 2100 sheet tray 51 98 146 card stock 58 105 153 envelopes 58 105 153 letterhead in 2100 sheet tray 51 98 146 letterhead in multipurpose feeder 58 105 153 letterhead in trays 44 91 139 multipurpose feeder 58 105 153 optional 250 sheet tray 44 91 139 optional 550 sheet tray 44 91 139 standard 250 sheet tray 44 standard 550 sheet tray 44 91 standard tray 139 transparencies 58 105 153 lock security 77 123 171 M maintenance kit ordering 248 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 290 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 290 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 291 memory types installed on printer 77 123 171 memory card 11 installing 15 Memory full 38 291 menu settings
186. hen a jam may occur Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration Using MS810de 96 e f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray e Make sure the paper is below the solid line which is the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams Using MS810de 97 e When using card stock labels or other types of specialty media make sure the paper is below the dashed line which is the alternate paper fill indicator 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810de 98 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS810de b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guid
187. hen printing 302 error reading flash drive 302 held jobs do not print 301 incorrect characters print 303 incorrect margins on prints 318 jammed pages are not reprinted 313 job prints from wrong tray 303 job prints on wrong paper 303 jobs do not print 306 Large jobs do not collate 304 multiple language PDF files do not print 305 paper curl 319 paper frequently jams 313 print job takes longer than expected 305 tray linking does not work 307 unexpected page breaks occur 308 printer 34 configurations 40 81 127 finishing features 182 minimum clearances 9 10 models 40 81 127 moving 9 10 257 259 selecting a location 9 10 shipping 259 printer control panel adjusting brightness 243 factory defaults restoring 76 122 170 indicator light 43 84 130 parts 42 83 129 Sleep button light 43 84 130 using 42 83 129 Index printer control panel virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 117 printer hard disk disposing of 77 123 171 encrypting 79 125 173 installing 22 removing 26 wiping 79 125 173 printer hard disk encryption 79 125 173 printer hard disk memory erasing 79 125 173 printer information where to find 7 printer IP address finding 87 134 printer is printing blank pages 323 printer messages x page jam clear manual feeder 250 272 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 264 x page jam open tray x 24x 271 x page jam open upper and lower rear door 2
188. holder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Deutsch Hiermit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet EMnvik ME THN MAPOYZA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPOONETAI MPO TIX OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TI AOINE ZXETIKE2 AIATAZEI TH OAHMIAZ 1999 5 EK English Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark In
189. ht arrow Scroll to the right 3 Up arrow t 4 Down arrow y Scroll up Scroll down 5 Submit changes made in the printer settings 6 Return to the previous screen 7 Return to the home screen 132 Using MS812de 133 Other touch screen buttons Touch aK Accept Save settings Cancel e Cancel an action or a selection Leave a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes Increase Select a higher value Decrease Select a lower value Exit Leave the current screen Search Search current held jobs Warning View a warning or error message Using MS812de 134 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only in some printer models e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more information go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Finding the IP address of the computer For Windows users 1 Inthe Run dialog box type cmd to open the command prompt 2 Type ipconfig and then look for the IP address For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu select Network 2 Select your connection type and then click Advanced gt TCP IP 3 Look for the IP address
190. ial and network buffers e The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer control panel The menu selection is then updated Understanding the printer menus Use Job Buffering Off On Auto Mac Binary PS On Off Auto ENA Address YYY YYY YYY YVY ENA Netmask YYY YYY YVY VVY ENA Gateway YYY YYY YYY YYY 205 To Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing Notes e Off is the factory default setting e On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs Notes Auto is the factory default setting On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs e Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol Set the network address information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the netmask information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port Set the gateway information for an external print server Note This menu is available only when
191. ickness impacts how much can be loaded into a tray e Surface roughness measured in Sheffield units impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper e Surface friction determines how easily sheets can be separated e Grain and formation impacts curling which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer Brightness and texture look and feel Recycled papers are better than ever however the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner they are not perfect The energy required to de ink and deal with additives such as colorants and glue often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production However using recycled papers enables better resource management overall Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor up to 80 of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device from design to end of life This is due to the energy intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper Thus Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on mini
192. ide Paper Saver Border None Solid Paper Saver Ordering Horizontal Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical Vertical 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models Print a border on each page image when using N Up pages per side Notes e None is the factory default setting This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using N Up pages per side Notes Horizontal is the factory default setting e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation e This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Understanding the printer menus Use Separator Sheets Off Between Copies Between Jobs Between Pages 227 a Ke Specify if blank separator sheets are inserted Notes e Off is the factory default setting Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print
193. ile Note Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Supported flash drives and file types Notes e High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 68 Recommended flash drives File type Lexar JumpDrive FireFly 512MB and 1GB Documents e SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB e pdf e Sony Micro Vault Classic 512MB and 1GB e xps Images e dcx e gif e jpeg or jpg e bmp e pcx e tiff or tif e png e fls Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Security gt OK gt Confidential Print gt select the print job type Print job type Description Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Confidential Job Expiration Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Repeat Job Expiration Lets you print and sto
194. in 455 457 273 x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 270 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 270 A accessing the Embedded Web Server 87 134 accessing the remote control panel Embedded Web Server 71 Active NIC menu 198 adding hardware options print driver 34 adjusting printer display brightness 243 adjusting Sleep mode 75 122 170 adjusting toner darkness 65 112 160 administrator settings Embedded Web Server 71 117 165 AppleTalk menu 203 applications home screen 88 135 attaching cables 32 available internal options 11 avoiding jams 179 avoiding paper jams 260 B Background and Idle Screen using 88 135 Bin Setup menu 196 buttons printer control panel 42 83 buttons touch screen using 86 131 C cables Ethernet 32 USB 32 canceling a print job from a computer 70 117 165 from the printer control panel 70 117 165 cannot open Embedded Web Server 333 card stock loading 58 105 153 tips 175 Cartridge low 88 xy 282 Cartridge nearly low 88 xy 282 Cartridge very low x estimated pages remain 88 xy 282 Change paper source to custom string load orientation 282 Change paper source to custom type name load orientation 282 Change paper source to paper size load orientation 283 Change paper source to paper type paper size load orientation 283 Check tray x connection 283 353 checking an unresponsive printer 299 checking st
195. information that will appear on the upper left and right corners of the control panel Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Displayed Information continued Black Toner Customize the displayed information for Black Toner Select from the following options When to display Do not display Display Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Do not display is the factory default setting for When to display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display A 219 Understanding the printer menus Use Displayed Information continued Paper Jam Load Paper Service Errors Home screen customization Change Language Search Held Jobs Held Jobs USB Drive Profiles and Apps Bookmarks Jobs by user Home screen customization Forms and Favorites Background and Idle Screen Eco Settings To Customize the displayed information for Paper Jam Load Paper and Service Errors Select from the following options Display Yes No Message to Display Default Alternate Default text entry Alternate text entry Notes This menu appears only in touch screen printer models e No isthe factory default setting for Display Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display Change the icons and buttons that appear on the control panel For each icon
196. ing solid black pages Yes Go to step 2 325 AoT The problem is solved Contact customer The problem is solved Step 2 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job support Is the printer printing solid black pages Repeating defects appear on prints Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Replace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is equal to any of the following e 47 8 mm 1 88 in e 96 8 mm 3 81 in e 28 5 mm 1 12 in b Resend the print job Do repeating defects still appear on prints Step 2 a Replace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal to either of the following e 94 25 mm 3 71 in e 95 2 mm 3 75 in b Resend the print job Do repeating defects still appear on prints Contact customer support The problem is solved Troubleshooting Shadow images appear on prints Leading edge BS ABCD ABCD Trailing edge 326 Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Load paper with the Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray correct paper type and weight in the tray Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray Step 2 Go to step 3 Change the paper From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper
197. ing the remote control panel The remote control panel on your computer screen lets you interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network printer From your computer screen you can view the printer status and do print related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e Print a network setup page or menu settings page and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Press Enter to open the Web page of your printer 3 Click Applications Note The remote control panel requires a Java plug in to launch Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low low very low or reach their end of life by setting the selectable alerts Notes e Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge imaging unit and maintenance kit e All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low low and very low supply conditions Not all selectable alerts can be set for the end of life supply condition E mail selectable alert is available for all supply conditions e The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts
198. int job Do the jobs print Step 5 a Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 5 Go to step 6 Troubleshooting Action Step 6 a Remove and then reinstall the printer software For more information see Installing the printer on page 34 Note The printer software is available at http support lexmark com b Resend the print job Do the jobs print Printing slows down Notes Yes The problem is solved No Contact customer support e When printing using narrow paper the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time or printing at elevated temperatures Action Step 1 type Note Use a 110 volt fuser for printing on letter size paper and a 220 volt fuser for printing on A4 size paper b Resend the print job Does the print speed increase Step 2 a Replace the fuser For more information on installing the fuser see the instruction sheet that came with the part b Resend the print job Does the print speed increase a Make sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the fuser Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Contact customer supp
199. inters 8 Hardware option Alternative hardware option 1 Staple finisher e Output expander e 4 bin mailbox Staple hole punch finisher 2 4 bin mailbox Staple finisher Staple hole punch finisher e Output expander Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oOo NnNIT ao wu RAJU Output expander 4 bin mailbox The staple hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options In a configuration with two or more optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top e The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 42 e The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander e The output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order When using optional trays e Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100 sheet tray The 2100 sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration e A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer e The optional 250 and 550 sheet trays may be installed in any order Using the printer control panel 10 9 8 7 j o Use the To 1 Display e View the printer status Set up and operate the printer 2 Select button Submit changes made in the printe
200. involves the exchange of a product or part the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark The replacement may be a new or repaired item The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced altered in need of a repair not included in warranty service damaged beyond repair or if the product is not free of all legal obligations restrictions liens and encumbrances As part of your warranty service and or replacement Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest version Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and or unauthorized products supplies parts materials such as toners and inks software or interfaces to stop working Authorized use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted Before you present this product for warranty service remove all print cartridges programs data and removable storage media unless directed otherwise by Lexmark For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee Extent of limited warranty Lexmark does not w
201. ion of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support 2 Paper is supported in long edge orientation 3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm 4 13 in to 216 mm 8 5 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 356 mm 14 in X Paper and specialty media guide Paper size Dimensions SECER Kol Optional Multipurpose optional 250 or 2100 sheet tray feeder 550 sheet tray 181 Duplex JIS B5 182 x 257 mm X 7 2 x 10 1 in v v v Letter 216 x 279 mm V 8 5x11in Legal 216 x 356 mm J 8 5 x 14 in Executive 184 x 267 mm J 7 3 x 10 5 in Oficio 216 x 340 mm J 8 5 x 13 4 in Folio 216 x 330 mm J 8 5 x 13 in Statement 140 x 216 mm J 5 5 x 8 5 in Universal 105 x 148 mm to 216 x 356 mm J 4 13 x 5 83 in to 8 5 x 14 in 70 x 127 mm to X 216 x 356 mm 2 76x5 to 8 5 x 14 in 7 3 4 Envelope 98 x 191 mm X Monarch 3 9 x 7 5 in 9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm X 3 9 x 8 9 in 10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm X 4 1 x 9 5 in DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm X 4 3 x 8 7 in C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm X 6 38 x 9 01 in B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm X 6 93 x 9 84 in 1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common
202. ions may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer Supported flash drives and file types Notes e High speed USB flash drives must support the full speed standard Low speed USB devices are not supported e USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table FAT system Devices formatted with New Technology File System NTFS or any other file system are not supported Using MS810de 115 File type Recommended flash drives Documents e pdf e xps Lexar JumpDrive FireFly 512MB and 1GB e SanDisk Cruzer Micro 512MB and 1GB e Sony Micro Vault Classic 512MB and 1GB Images e dcx e gif e jpeg or jpg e bmp e pcx e tiff or tif e png e fls Printing confidential and other held jobs Storing print jobs in the printer 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Security gt Confidential Print gt select a print job type Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered Note When the limit is reached the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted Max Invalid PIN Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control panel Note The PIN is set from the computer It must be four digits using the numbers 0 9 Confidential Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory Repeat Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies It lets you e
203. irements of EN 60950 1 Products equipped with 2 4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC and 1999 5 EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment CECEO Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries but is restricted to indoor use only Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hung ria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below AT EE EL IT LI PT RO Spole nost Lexmark International Inc t mto prohla uje e v robek tento v robek je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi ustanoven mi sm rnice 1999 5 ES esky Dansk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produkt overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Hie
204. is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention J Sleep button light Printer status off The printer is off idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow pulsing pattern Understanding the home screen When the printer is turned on the display shows a basic screen referred to as the home screen Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Search Held Jobs Held Jobs Forms and Favorites Eco Settings gt r Status Ready Supplies Touch any button to Fi 7 6 5 n o Using MS812de 131 Touch ae 1 Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs 2 Held Jobs Display all current held jobs 3 Forms and Favorites Access frequently used online forms 4 Eco Settings Adjust energy consumption noise toner and paper usage 5 Menus Access printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state 6 Status message bar e Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show printer
205. izes e Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 47 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 48 e Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration e f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn e Make sure the paper is below the solid line which is the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 49 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 50
206. jammed paper bin 451 x page jam lift front cover to remove cartridge 200 201 A CAUTION HOT SURFACE The inside of the printer might be hot To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component allow the surface to cool before touching 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door 2 Lift the green handle and then pull the toner cartridge out of the printer Clearing jams 265 3 Place the cartridge aside 4 Lift the green handle and then pull the imaging unit out of the printer 5 Place the imaging unit aside on a flat smooth surface Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 6 Pull the jammed paper gently to the right and then remove it from the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Warning Potential Damage The jammed paper may be covered with toner which can stain garments and skin 7 Install the imaging unit Note Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide Clearing jams 266 8 Insert the cartridge into the printer and then push the green handle back into place Notes e Align the arrows on the guides of the toner cartridge with the arrows in the printer e Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in 9 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover ae 7 10 Do either of the
207. jobs 68 115 163 streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 327 streaked vertical lines appear on prints 328 streaks appear 331 Substitute Size menu 189 supplies checking status 73 120 168 checking from printer control panel 120 checking on the printer control panel 168 checking using the Embedded Web Server 73 120 168 conserving 244 storing 249 360 using genuine Lexmark 246 using recycled paper 243 supplies ordering imaging unit 247 maintenance kit 248 roller kit 248 staple cartridges 248 toner cartridges 246 Supply needed to complete job 297 supply notifications configuring 71 118 166 supported flash drives 67 114 162 supported paper sizes 180 supported paper types 180 supported paper weights 180 T TCP IP menu 200 telecommunication notices 346 tips card stock 175 labels paper 176 on using envelopes 175 transparencies 176 tips on using envelopes 175 toner cartridge replacing 249 251 toner cartridges ordering 246 recycling 245 toner darkness adjusting 65 112 160 Too many bins attached 58 297 Too many disks installed 58 297 Too many flash options installed 58 298 Too many trays attached 58 298 touch screen buttons using 86 131 transparencies loading 58 105 153 tips 176 Tray x paper size unsupported 298 trays linking 63 110 111 158 159 unlinking 63 110 111 158 159 troubleshooting an application error has occurred 333 cannot open Embedded Web S
208. k printers 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Copy Printer Settings 3 To change the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers Note If you want to add or remove target printers then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to A gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Using MS810de 120 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to A gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Checking
209. kit ordering 248 S safety information 5 6 security modifying confidential print settings 72 118 166 Security Audit Log menu 214 security lock 77 123 171 security settings erasing 78 security settings information erasing 124 172 security Web page where to find 80 126 174 selecting a location for the printer 9 10 selecting paper 177 Serial x menu 207 Serial port x disabled 56 296 serial printing setting up 39 Set Date and Time menu 214 setting paper size 43 91 138 paper type 43 91 138 TCP IP address 200 setting the Universal paper size 91 138 setting Universal paper size 43 setting up serial printing 39 Setup menu 227 shipping the printer 259 showing icons on the home screen 88 135 Sleep button printer control panel 42 83 129 Sleep Mode adjusting 122 Sleep mode adjusting 75 170 SMTP Setup menu 210 Some held jobs were not restored 297 standard 250 sheet tray loading 44 139 standard 550 sheet tray loading 44 91 139 Standard Network menu 198 Standard network software error 54 297 standard tray loading 44 91 139 Standard USB menu 204 Standard USB port disabled 56 297 staple cartridge replacing 254 staple cartridges ordering 248 statement of volatility 77 123 171 status of parts checking 120 168 status of parts and supplies checking 73 status of supplies checking 120 168 Stop or Cancel button printer control panel 42 83 129 storing paper 179 supplies 249 storing print
210. l Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Using specialty media Tips on using card stock Card stock is heavy single ply specialty media Many of its variable characteristics such as moisture content thickness and texture can significantly affect print quality From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the card stock loaded in the tray Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Preprinting perforation and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed problems Before loading the card stock on the tray flex and fan the card stock to loosen them Straighten the edges ona level surface Tips on using envelopes From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the envelopes loaded in the tray Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers For best performance use envelopes made from 90 g m 24 Ib paper or 25 cotton Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages To optimize performance and minimize jams do not use envelopes that Have excessive curl or twist Are stuck together or damage
211. l not to scratch them e Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop e Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time e Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled Using MS810de 108 e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher not XR One sided printing Two sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing w e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur One sided printing Two sided printing Using MS810de 109 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer e Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill
212. lace heavy objects on the power cord Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls If any of these things happen a risk of fire or electrical shock results Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it Refer service or repairs other than those described in the user documentation to a service representative A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as a power cord a fax feature or USB cable during a lightning storm CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Overview 7 Overview Using this guide This User s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that are listed on the cover page The following chapters contain information applicable to all printer models e Safety information e Selecting a location for the printer e Additional printer setup Paper and specialty media guide e Understanding printer menus e Saving money and the environme
213. lat Paper and specialty media guide 180 Supported paper sizes types and weights The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes types and weights of paper they support Note For an unlisted paper size select the closest larger listed size Paper types and weights supported by the printer The printer engine supports 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper weights Paper type 250 or 550 sheet 2100 sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplex trays Paper V V V V Card stock X Plain Envelope X Rough Envelope Paper labels Pharmacy labels X ee x LISISISIS x Transparencies vV X V X Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together For more information see Tips on using transparencies on page 176 X J Paper sizes supported by the printer Note When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of time to ensure the best print performance Paper size Dimensions SECER Kol Optional Multipurpose Duplex optional 250 or 2100 sheet tray feeder 550 sheet tray 210 x 297 mm 8 3 x 11 7 in 148 x 210 mm 5 8 x 8 3 in A6 105 x 148 mm 4 1 x 5 8 in 1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the posit
214. ld Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Copy Printer Settings 3 To change the language select a language from the drop down menu and then click Click here to submit language 4 Click Printer Settings 5 Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers Note If you want to add or remove target printers then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP 6 Click Copy Printer Settings Printing a menu settings page From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Menu Settings Page Using MS812de 168 Printing a network setup page If the printer is attached to a network then print a network setup page to verify the network connection This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Reports gt Network Setup Page 2 Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected If the status is Not Connected then the LAN drop may not be active or the network cable may be malfunctioning Consult your system support person for a solution and then print another network setup page Checking the status of parts and supplies A message appears on the printer
215. lem is solved La Troubleshooting Print irregularities Leading edge LESAGn 320 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper type and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 4 Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes Are you printing on textured or rough paper Step 5 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear From the printer control panel set the paper texture in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Go to step 6 Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do print irregularities still appear Step 2 Go to step 3 Specify the paper size From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper and type from the tray menu to match the paper loaded in the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded in tray the tray Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Go to step 5 The problem is solved Step 6
216. liver unpredictable results if third party supplies or parts are used Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components Estimated number of remaining pages The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer Its accuracy may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors such as actual document content print quality settings and other printer settings The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is different from the historical printing consumption Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing supplies based on the estimate Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer the estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5 coverage per page Ordering toner cartridges Notes e Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO IEC 19752 standard Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield Return Program cartridge For the United States and Canada Toner Cartridge High Yield Toner Cartridge Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 521x This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS812de printer models For more information on countries located in each region visit www lexmark com regions Maintaining the printer
217. ll paper fragments are removed 6 Insert the standard tray Clearing jams 270 7 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch JS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove standard bin jam 203 1 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 2 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 1 Pull out the tray completely Note Lift the tray slightly and pull it out 2 Push down the front duplex flap then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull the paper to the right and out of the printer Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 271 3 Insert the tray 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK x page jam open tray x 24x 1 Check which tray is indicated on the printer display and then pull the tray i
218. lling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray 152 Using MS812de 153 6 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Using MS812de 154 2 Using the handle pull the multipurpose feeder extender Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 155 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading e Flexsheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them e Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper or specialty media Note Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop Load only one size and type of
219. lowing 1 Go to http support lexmark com 2 Click Software Solutions and then select either of the following e Scan to Network This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application e Other Applications This lets you find information about the other applications 3 Click the Manuals tab and then select the document for the home screen application Using Background and Idle Screen Description The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen 1 From the home screen navigate to Change Background gt select background to use 2 Touch A Using MS810de 89 Setting up Forms and Favorites Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide go to http support lexmark com Use To Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system X J 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field
220. maging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Yes Go to step 2 324 The problem is solved Step 2 a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Step 3 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Is the printer still printing blank pages Printer is printing solid black pages Go to step 3 Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Is the printer print
221. mated pages remain 84 xy 285 Incompatible output bin x 59 285 Incompatible tray x 59 286 Incorrect paper size open paper source 34 286 Insert hole punch box 286 Insert staple cartridge 286 Insert Tray x 286 Install bin x 287 Install Tray x 287 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 37 287 Insufficient memory to collate job 37 288 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 35 288 Insufficient memory some Held Jobs were deleted 37 287 358 Insufficient memory some held jobs will not be restored 37 288 Load paper source with custom string paper orientation 288 Load paper source with custom type name paper orientation 289 Load paper source with paper size paper orientation 289 Load paper source with paper type paper size paper orientation 289 Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation 289 Load manual feeder with custom type name paper orientation 290 Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation 290 Load manual feeder with paper type paper size paper orientation 290 Load staples 288 Maintenance kit low 80 xy 290 Maintenance kit nearly low 80 xy 290 Maintenance kit very low x estimated pages remain 80 xy 291 Memory full 38 291 Network x software error 54 291 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 291 Paper changes needed 292 Parallel po
222. may cause a jam 2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place Note Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810de 93 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes e Lock the length guide for all paper sizes Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810de 94 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not One sided printing One sided printing Using MS810de 95 Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher a gt oN Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray t
223. me a la norme RSS 210 d Industry Canada Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes Notices 346 1 cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d interf rences et 2 il doit accepter toute interf rence recue y compris celles risquant d alt rer son fonctionnement Cet appareil a t con u pour fonctionner uniquement avec l antenne fournie L utilisation de toute autre antenne est strictement interdite par la r glementation d Industry Canada En application des r glementations d Industry Canada l utilisation d une antenne de gain sup rieur est strictement interdite Pour emp cher toute interf rence radio au service faisant l objet d une licence cet appareil doit tre utilis a l int rieur et loin des fen tres afin de garantir une protection optimale Si le mat riel ou son antenne d mission est install a l ext rieur il doit faire l objet d une licence L installateur de cet quipement radio doit veiller a ce que l antenne soit implant e et dirig e de mani re n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to Users in the European Union Products be
224. media before loading it e Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand e Do not mix paper sizes weights or types in the same tray e Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel e Store paper per manufacturer recommendations Understanding jam messages and locations When a jam occurs a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer display Open the doors covers and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam Notes e When Jam Assist is set to On Discarding pages appears on the display and the printer flushes blank or pages with partial prints to the standard bin after a jammed page is cleared Check your printed output for blank pages e When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto the printer reprints jammed pages However the Auto setting reprints jammed pages if adequate printer memory is available Clearing jams 263 Jam location Printer message What to do Remove paper from the stapler bin open the stapler stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 door then remove the staple cartridge and then 457 remove the jammed staples 2 Standard bin x page jam remove standard bin Remove jammed paper from the standard bin jam 203 3 Inside the printer x page jam lift front cover to remove Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder cartridge 200 201 then remove the toner cartridge a
225. menu settings page and then check to see if the internal option is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page Step 4 Go to step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Connect the internal option to the controller board Reinstall the internal option Contact customer a Check if the internal option is selected support It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 34 b Resend the print job Does the internal option operate correctly XX A Internal print server does not operate correctly Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Check if the internal Reinstall the internal print server print KAN X a Remove and then install the internal print server For more supported oy tre information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 16 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the internal print server is listed in the Installed Features list Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list ka printer Note An internal print server from another printer may not work with this printer Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Check the cable and the internal print server connection Use the correct cable and then check if it is securel
226. mizing the impact of paper Using recycled paper is one way Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another Lexmark is well equipped to help Paper and specialty media guide 179 customers minimize printing and copying waste In addition the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers although a converter s product list for special applications is maintained However the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing 1 2 3 Minimize paper consumption Be selective about the origin of wood fiber Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council FSC or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification PEFC These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs normal 75 or 80 g m certified paper lower weight paper or recycled paper Unacceptable paper examples Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper also known as carbonless papers Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the print
227. more than the available memory Notes e Off is the factory default setting This sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs e On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets If the printer runs out of memory thenMemory Full 38 appears on the printer display but downloads are not deleted Understanding the printer menus 229 Print All Order Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed Alphabetical when Print All is selected Oldest First Note Alphabetical is the factory default setting Newest First Finishing menu Use aie Sides Duplex Specify whether two sided duplex printing is set as the default for all print jobs 1 sided Notes 2 sided e 1 sided is the factory default setting e You can set two sided printing from the printer software For Windows users Click File gt Print and then click Properties Preferences Options or Setup For Macintosh users Choose File gt Print and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop up menus Duplex Binding Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed Long Edge Notes Short Edge Long Edge is the factory default setting Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape e Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the
228. move residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on the touch screen displays a list of functions 3 Touch Wipe Disk and then touch one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task e Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 5 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Configuring printer hard disk encryption Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen Note Some printe
229. mpty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label You can also do the following 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 From the Toner Cartridges section select your country or region 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Maintaining the printer 246 Maintaining the printer Warning Potential Damage Failure to maintain optimum printer performance or to replace parts and supplies may cause damage to your printer Ordering supplies To order parts and supplies in the U S contact Lexmark at 1 800 539 6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area In other countries or regions go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts Use of third party supplies or parts may affect the performance reliability or life of the printer and its imaging components Use of third party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage Damage caused by the use of third party supplies or parts is not covered by the warranty All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may de
230. n mettre aucun champ HF d passant les limites fix es pour l ensemble de la population par Sant Canada Reportez vous au Code de s curit 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Sant Canada www hc sc gc ca rpb Le terme IC pr c dant le num ro de d accr ditation inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme aux sp cifications techniques d Industry Canada Notice to users in the European Union Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004 108 EC 2006 95 EC 1999 5 EC and 2011 65 EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Notices 351 Compliance is indicated by the CE marking The manufacturer of this product is Lexmark International Inc 740 West New Circle Road Lexington KY 40550 USA The authorized representative is Lexmark International Technology Hungaria Kft 8 Lechner d n fasor Millennium Tower Ill 1095 Budapest HUNGARY A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requ
231. n Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key 1 Custom Key 2 217 Specify a language and custom key information for the control panel keyboard The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the keypad on the control panel Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Custom Key 2 appears only in select touch screen printer models Paper Sizes US Metric Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes Notes e US is the factory default setting e The initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard Understanding the printer menus 218 Displayed Information Left side Right side Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the control panel For the Left side and Right side options select from the following options None IP Address Hostname Contact Name Location Date Time mDNS DDNS Service Name Zero Configuration Name Custom Text x Model Name Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side Date Time is the factory default setting for Right side Displayed Information continued Custom Text x Customize displayed
232. n also see the Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide for additional information 1 Go to www lexmark com and then navigate to Support amp Downloads gt select your printer 2 Click the Manuals tab and then select Embedded Web Server Security Administrator s Guide Using MS810de 81 Using MS810de Learning about the printer Printer configurations Basic model Standard bin Printer control panel Multipurpose feeder hl win e Standard 550 sheet tray Tray 1 Fully configured model CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS810de 82 The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 8 Hardware option Alternative hardware option 1 Staple finisher Output expander 4 bin mailbox Staple hole punch finisher 2 4 bin mailbox e Staple finisher e Staple hole punch finisher Output expander Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray
233. n the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until it clicks into place and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom Attaching cables A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections such as a power cord a fax feature or USB cable during a lightning storm Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable Make sure to match the following e The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer e The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port e The appropriate parallel cable with the parallel port Additional printer setup 33 Use the To 1 Parallel port Connect the printer to a computer Note This can also be used in installing an optional Internal Solutions Port ISP 2 USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter 3 Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network 4 USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer 5 Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the controller board 6 Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the USB cable any wireless network adapter or the printer in the area shown while actively printing Loss of data or a malfunction can occur Note This feature is available only if you purchase optional trays and a caster base After attaching the Eth
234. nd MS812 Fuser maintenance kit type Part number 40X8420 40X8421 Type 00 Type 01 Type 02 40X8422 Type 03 40X8423 40X8424 Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810 MS811 and MS812 Fuser maintenance kit type Part number Maintaining the printer Fuser maintenance kit type Part number Type 07 Type 08 Type 09 40X8429 Storing supplies 249 Choose a cool clean storage area for the printer supplies Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them Do not expose supplies to Direct sunlight Temperatures above 35 C 95 F High humidity above 80 Salty air Corrosive gases Heavy dust Replacing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 250 2 Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle 3 Unpack the new toner cartridge then remove the packing material and then shake the cartridge to redistribute ue a 4 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Note Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in Warning Potential Damage When replacing a toner cartridge do not leave the imaging unit exposed to direct light for an extended period of time Extended exposure to light may cause p
235. nd the imaging unit and then remove the jammed paper 4 Multipurpose feeder x page jam clear manual Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder and feeder 250 then remove the jammed paper 1 Staple finisher x page jam remove paper open 5 Duplex area x page jam remove tray 1 to clear Pull out tray 1 completely then push down the front duplex 235 239 duplex flap and then remove the jammed paper 6 Trays x page jam open tray x 24x Pull out the indicated tray and then remove the jammed paper 7 Output expander x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the output expander and then expander rear door Leave paper in remove the jammed paper bin 41y xx 8 Upper rear door x page jam open upper rear Open the rear door of the printer and then remove door 202 the jammed paper Clearing jams 264 Jam location Printer message What to do Upper door and rear x page jam open upper and lower duplex area rear door 231 234 Mailbox x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the mailbox and then remove mailbox rear door Leave paper in the jammed paper bin 43y xx Open the rear door of the printer and the rear duplex area and then remove the jammed paper 11 Staple finisher rear x page jam remove paper open Open the rear door of the staple finisher and then door finisher rear door Leave paper in remove the
236. ndard tray is the factory default setting MP Feeder From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder or MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Paper Saver Print multiple page images on one side of a paper Off Notes 2 Up 3 Up e Off is the factory default setting 4 Up The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Paper Saver Ordering Specify the positioning of multiple page images when using Paper Saver Horizontal Notes Reverse Horizontal Reverse Vertical e Horizontal is the factory default setting Vertical e Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting The printer chooses between portrait and Landscape landscape Portrait Paper Saver Border Print a border when using Paper Saver None Note None is the factory default setting Solid 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models XR Understanding the printer menus 231 Use To Staple Job Specify whether printed output is stapled off Notes On e Offis the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple
237. ne which is the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams Using MS812de 145 e When using card stock labels or other types of specialty media make sure the paper is below the dashed line which is the alternate paper fill indicator 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack and then lock the length guide 7 Insert the tray 8 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS812de 146 Loading the 2100 sheet tray CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY To reduce the risk of equipment instability load each tray separately Keep all other trays closed until needed 1 Pull out the tray 2 Adjust the width and length guides Loading A5 size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5 Using MS812de 147 b Squeeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place c Remove the A5 length guide from its holder d Insert the A5 length guide into its designated slot Note Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place Using MS812de 148 at Bs Loading A4 letter legal oficio and folio size paper a Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for
238. nej poistke Nevystavujte sa l om PELIGRO Se producen radiaciones l ser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado Evite la exposici n al haz de l ser FARA Osynlig laserstralning n r patroner tas ur och sp rrmekanismen r upph vd Undvik exponering f r laserstr len ER YR ERER SA ABA ROCRUN TEASER TERBORIER Fo JERR PERE EBC TB Bd OP E EAT LEN TRE See CE EINER FP ER 2 hY vR j n Ay 7 BAITS EL WAR FERRE NET COLO POHICHRE SRWEDIC LTS RSV Power consumption Product power consumption The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product Note Some modes may not apply to your product Power consumption Watts 670 MS810n and MS810dn 700 MS810de 770 MS811n and MS811dn 830 MS812dn and MS812de Mode Description Printing The product is generating hard copy output from electronic inputs Copy The product is generating hard copy output from N A hard copy original documents Scan The product is scanning hard copy documents N A Ready The product is waiting for a print job Ready 1 55 MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn and MS812dn 60 MS810de and MS812de Ready 2 30 All printer models 2 9 MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn and MS812dn 3 3 MS810de 3 7 MS812de Sleep Mode The product is in a high level energy saving mode 0 5 MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn and MS810de 0 6 M
239. network cards Auto is the factory default setting e This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed Standard Network or Network x menu Note Only active ports appear in this menu Use a Ke Energy Efficient Ethernet Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet Enable network Disable Note Enable is the factory default setting PCL SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires On it regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting e If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu Understanding the printer menus 199 Use aI PS SmartSwitch Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it On regardless of the default printer language Off Notes On is the factory default setting If PS SmartSwitch is disabled then the printer does not examine incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu NPA Mode Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional Off communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol Auto Notes Network Buffer Auto 3KB to maximum size allowed Auto is the factory default setting The printer automatic
240. nformation see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 16 b Print a menu settings page and then check if the USB or parallel interface card is listed in the Installed Features list Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features list Yes Go to step 2 No Check if you have a supported USB or parallel interface card Note A USB or parallel interface card from another printer may not work on this printer Step 2 Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the USB or parallel interface card Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly Na The problem is solved Contact customer support Troubleshooting Paper feed problems Jammed pages are not reprinted Action a Turn on jam recovery 1 From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Print Recovery gt Jam Recovery 2 Select On or Auto 3 Depending on your printer model press OK or touch Submit b Resend the pages that did not print Were the jammed pages reprinted Yes The problem is solved 313 Contact customer support Paper frequently jams Action Step 1 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray e Check if the paper size indicators on the
241. ng Custom Types Custom Names Custom Bin Names Universal Setup Bin Setup Security Edit Security Setups Miscellaneous Security Settings Confidential Print Erase Temporary Data Files Security Audit Log Set Date and Time Reports Menu Settings Page Device Statistics Stapler Test Network Setup Paget Profiles List Print Fonts Print Directory Asset Report Settings General Settings Flash Drive Menu Print Settings Help Print All Guides Print Quality Printing Guide 185 Network Ports Active NIC Standard Network Standard USB Parallel x Serial x SMTP Setup Option Card Menu A list of installed DLEs Download Emulators appears Print Defects Guide Information Guide Supplies Guide 1 Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network x Setup Page 2 Depending on the printer setup this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network x 3 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 4 This menu appears only in some touch screen printer models 5 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed Understanding the printer menus 186 Paper menu Vinyl label is supported only in MS710 Series printer models Default Source menu Use a Ke Default Source Set a default paper source for all print jobs Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder MP Feeder Manual Paper e Tray 1 standard tray is the factory default se
242. ng MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 54 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Put the AS length guide in its holder Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 55 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex and fan the sheets to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly e There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn One sided printing Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher One sided printing XR Two sided printing Two sided printing 56 e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Ses One sided printing Two sided printing i Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn e Make sure the paper is bel
243. ng from Hibernate mode Blinking amber for 0 1 second then goes The printer is in Hibernate mode completely off for 1 9 seconds in a slow pulsing pattern Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 260 and Storing paper on page 179 Setting the paper size and type 1 From the printer control panel navigate to NN P gt Settings gt OK gt Paper Menu gt OK gt Paper Size Type gt OK 2 Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder and then press OK 3 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size and then press OK 4 Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type and then press OK to change the settings Configuring Universal paper settings The Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 44 Notes e The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches for two sided duplex printing e The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for one sided and two sided printing e When printing on paper less than 210 mm 8 3 inches wide the printer may print at a reduced speed after a period of tim
244. nly the Multiple pass method Security Audit Log menu Use To Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log Notes e To export the audit log from the printer control panel a flash drive must be attached to the printer e The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a computer Delete Log Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted Yes Note Yes is the factory default setting No Configure Log Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created Enable Audit Notes Yes No e Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog No is the factory default setting Enable Remote Syslog eine y 8 No Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server No is the y factory default setting es Remote Syslog Facility 0 23 Severity of events to log 0 7 Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server 4 is the factory default setting e If the security audit log is activated then the severity value of each event is recorded 4 is the factory default setting Set Date and Time menu Use Current Date and Time ammm Show the current date and time settings for the printer Manually Set Date and Time input date time Enter the date and time Notes e Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No e The wizard lets you set the dat
245. nstalled then remove the printer hard disk first For more information see Removing a printer hard disk on page 26 Additional printer setup 3 Unpack the ISP kit 1 ISP solution Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP 2 3 Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 4 Plastic bracket 4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening a Loosen the screw b Lift the metal cover and then pull it out completely Additional printer setup 18 5 Align the posts of the plastic bracket with the holes on the controller board cage and then press the plastic bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place Make sure the cables are neatly tucked under the plastic bracket 6 Install the ISP on the plastic bracket Note Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the controller board cage Additional printer setup 7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket Note Turn the screw clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place but do not tighten it yet 19 Additional printer setup 9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield 10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP Warning Potential Damage Do not
246. nt e Maintaining the printer e Clearing jams Troubleshooting To find instructions for your printer e Use the table of contents Use the Search function or the Find toolbar of your application to search for page content Finding information about the printer What are you looking for Find it here Initial setup instructions Setup documentation The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available at http support lexmark com Connecting the printer Installing the printer software Additional setup and instructions for using the printer User s Guide and Quick Reference Guide The guides are e Selecting and storing paper and specialty media available at http support lexmark com e Loading paper Note These guides are also available in other languages e Configuring printer settings e Viewing and printing documents and photos e Setting up and using the printer software e Configuring the printer on a network e Caring for and maintaining the printer Troubleshooting and solving problems Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility Lexmark Accessibility Guide This guide is available at features of your printer http support lexmark com X Overview What are you looking for Help using the printer software Find it here Windows or Mac Help Opena printer software program or application and then click Help Click 2 to view context s
247. nt Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc Marigold Arthur Baker Monaco Apple Computer Inc New York Apple Computer Inc Oxford Arthur Baker Palatino Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Stempel Garamond Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Taffy Agfa Corporation Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc Univers Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries K Notices 337 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc Licensing notices All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD Noise emission levels The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296 Note Some modes may not apply to your product 1 meter average sound pressure dBA Printing 57 MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn and MS812dn 58 MS810de and MS812de 32 all models Values are subject to change See www lexmark com for current values Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE directive The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in count
248. nter home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 To export or import a configuration for one application do the following a Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management b From the list of installed applications click the name of the application you want to configure c Click Configure and then do either of the following e To export a configuration to a file click Export and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file Notes When saving the configuration file you can type a unique file name or use the default name Ifa JVM Out of Memory error occurs then repeat the export process until the configuration file is saved e To import a configuration from a file click Import and then browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer Notes Before importing the configuration file you can choose to preview it first or load it directly Ifa timeout occurs and a blank screen appears then refresh the Web browser and then click Apply 3 To export or import a configuration for multiple applications do the following a Click Settings gt Import Export b Do either of the following e To export a configuration file click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File and then follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file e To import a con
249. o Mode 74 120 168 Hibernate mode 76 122 170 Quiet mode 75 121 169 Sleep Mode 122 Sleep mode 75 170 conserving supplies 244 contacting customer support 334 control panel printer indicator light 43 84 130 Sleep button light 43 84 130 controller board accessing 11 creating custom name paper type 110 Custom Bin Names menu 195 Custom Names menu 194 custom paper type assigning 64 159 custom paper type name assigning 111 creating 63 158 Custom Type x assigning a paper type 64 changing name 158 creating custom name 110 Custom Type x name creating 63 Custom Types menu 194 customer support contacting 334 D Default Source menu 186 Defective flash detected 51 284 device and network settings erasing 78 device and network settings information erasing 124 172 directory list printing 70 117 165 Disk must be formatted for use in this device 284 Disk near full Securely clearing disk space 284 disk wiping 79 125 173 display troubleshooting printer display is blank 301 display printer control panel 42 83 adjusting brightness 243 disposing of printer hard disk 77 123 171 documents printing from Macintosh 64 112 160 from Windows 64 112 160 E Eco Mode setting 74 120 168 Eco Settings about 89 understanding 136 Edit Security Setups menu 211 embedded solutions erasing 78 embedded solutions information erasing 124 172 Embedded Web Server accessing 87 134 accessing the remote control panel
250. ociated with Eco Mode Notes Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory default settings e Off supports the performance specifications of the printer Energy Reduce energy use especially when the printer is idle Notes e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print You may notice a short delay before the first page is printed The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity e The printer display is turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned off when the printer is in Sleep mode Energy Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes Plain Paper Enable the automatic two sided duplex printing feature 4 Click Submit Reducing printer noise Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt General Settings gt Quiet Mode 3 Select a setting Using MS812de 170 Use aie On Reduce printer noise Notes e Print jobs process at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not st
251. of liability Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph Lexmark s liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS INCIDENTAL DAMAGE OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark Lexmark s and its Suppliers and Remarketers limitations of remedies are not cumulative Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation Additional rights Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you This limited warranty gives you spe
252. of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies A minimum separation of 20 cm 8 inches must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies Industry Canada Canada This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population consult Safety Code 6 obtainable from Health Canada s Web site www hc sc gc ca rpb The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met Industry Canada Canada Cet appareil est confor
253. on go to www lexmark com or contact the place where you purchased the printer Finding the IP address of the computer For Windows users 1 Inthe Run dialog box type cmd to open the command prompt 2 Type ipconfig and then look for the IP address For Macintosh users 1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu select Network 2 Select your connection type and then click Advanced gt TCP IP 3 Look for the IP address Finding the IP address of the printer Note Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server You can find the printer IP address From the top left corner of the printer home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Accessing the Embedded Web Server The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer 1 Obtain the printer IP address From the printer control panel home screen From the TCP IP section in the Network Ports menu e By printing a network setup page or menu settings page and then finding the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Open a Web browser and then type the printer
254. on volatile memory EEPROM and NAND flash memory Both types are used to store the operating system device settings network information bookmark settings and embedded solutions Using MS810de 124 Type of memory Description Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed The printer hard disk is designed for device specific functionality This lets the device retain buffered user data from complex print jobs as well as form data and font data Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances The printer is being decommissioned e The printer hard disk is being replaced e The printer is being moved to a different department or location e The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization e The printer is being removed from your premises for service e The printer is being sold to another organization Disposing of a printer hard disk Note Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer or its hard disk is removed from your premises Degaussing Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data e Crushing Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable e Milling Physically
255. oner fog or background shading appears on prints Action Step 1 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 2 b Resend the print job Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting 330 Action Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the prints Toner rubs off Leading edge ABC rad K Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Specify the paper type From the Paper menu on the printer control panel check the paper type texture and weight texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper Do the paper type texture and weight match the paper loaded in the leaded th Ume May tray Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved Resend the print job support Does the toner still rub off a J Toner specks appear on prints Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Do toner specks appear on prints Tr
256. ons Print annotations in a PDF Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print PostScript menu Print PS Error Print a page containing the PostScript error On Off Lock PS Startup Mode On Off Note Off is the factory default setting Disable the SysStart file Note Off is the factory default setting Font Priority Establish the font search order Resident Notes Flash Disk Resident is the factory default setting e This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly e Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read write write or password protected e Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100 PCL Emul menu Font Source Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu Resident Notes Disk Download e Resident is the factory default setting Resident shows the factory Flash default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM All e Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option e The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read write write or password protected Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM e All shows all fonts available to any option Understanding the printer menus 236 Font Name Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored
257. ontact customer support and then report the message If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Memory full 38 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Cancel job to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Install additional printer memory Network x software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Turn off the printer wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on e Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 52 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the flash memory e Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card Note Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted Troubleshooting 292 PPDS font error 50 Try one or more of the following From the print
258. ormation see the setup documentation that came with the printer Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure Step 5 Go to step 6 Contact your system Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers support person Note Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server Are the Web proxy servers disabled Step 6 The problem is solved Contact customer Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP address support in the address field Did the Embedded Web Server open Contacting customer support When you contact customer support you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing the message on the printer display and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution You need to know your printer model type and serial number For more information see the label at the back of the printer The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem Visit the Lexmark Web site at http support lexmark com and then select one of the following p Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals support documentation drivers and other downloads to help you solve common problems E mail You can send an e mail to the Lexmark team describing your problem A service representative will respond and p
259. ort Tray linking does not work Notes e The trays can detect paper length e The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size You must set the size from the Paper Size Type menu Troubleshooting Action Step 1 a Open the trays and then check if they contain paper of the same size and type Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size of the paper loaded in each tray e Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Step 2 a Fromthe printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked Note The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked b Resend the print job Do the trays link correctly Unexpected page breaks occur Action Step 1 Adjust the print timeout settings a From the printer control panel navigate to Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Print Timeout b Select a higher setting and then depending on your printer model select OK or Submit c Resend the print job Did the file print correctly Step 2 a Check the original file for manual page breaks b Resend the print job Did the file print correctly 308 Yes No The problem is solved The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved T
260. ose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib grain long paper The 2100 sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60 135 g m 16 36 Ib grain long paper Paper lighter than 60 g m 16 Ib might not be stiff enough to feed properly and may cause jams Note Two sided printing is supported for 60 176 g m 16 47 Ib paper Curl Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer where it is exposed to high temperatures Storing paper unwrapped in hot humid cold or dry conditions even in the trays can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems Smoothness Paper smoothness directly affects print quality If paper is too rough toner cannot fuse to it properly If paper is too smooth it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality Moisture content The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before prin
261. oubleshooting 331 Transparency print quality is poor Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Set the paper type to From the printer control panel set the paper type in the Paper menu to Transparency match the paper loaded in the tray Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency Step 2 Contact customer The problem is solved a Check if you are using a recommended type of transparency support b Resend the print job Is the print quality still poor Uneven print density BS ABCD ABCD Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer The problem is solved support Is the print density uneven Vertical voids appear on prints Leading edge A Trailing edge Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 The problem is solved a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Troubleshooting 332 Action Yes No Step 2 Go to step 3 The problem is solved a From the printer control panel set the paper type and weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved Check if you are using a recommended type of paper a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on p
262. ow the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams 5 Insert the tray Note Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray 57 Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 58 6 From the printer control panel set the size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Loading the multipurpose feeder 1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door Note Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 59 2 Pull the multipurpose feeder extender Note Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open 3 Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Note Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 60 4 Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading e Flexsheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies Be careful not to scratch them e Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Straighten the edges on a level surface
263. p the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Additional printer setup 27 Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors 1 Access the controller board For more information see Accessing the controller board on page 11 2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk To unplug the cable squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling out the cable JTAAANAANNS 3 Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place Additional printer setup 28 4 Remove the printer hard disk 5 Set aside the printer hard disk Installing hardware options Order of installation A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the elect
264. page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Copies Specify the default number of copies for each print job 1 999 Note 1 is the factory default setting Blank Pages Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job Do Not Print Note Do Not Print is the factory default setting Print Collate Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies 1 1 1 2 2 2 Note 1 1 1 2 2 2 is the factory default setting 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models lt Understanding the printer menus 230 Use To Separator Sheets Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted Off Notes Between Copies Batw enJobs e Off is the factory default setting Between Pages Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to 1 2 3 1 2 3 If Collate is set to 1 1 1 2 2 2 then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages such as after all page 1 s and after all page 2 s Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document Separator Source Specify the paper source for the separator sheet Tray x Notes Multipurpose Feeder e Tray 1 sta
265. page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints Set the printer to Hibernate Timeout even when there is an active Ethernet connection Notes e If Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Do Not Hibernate then the printer never automatically hibernates e if Hibernate Timeout on Connection is set to Hibernate then the printer follows the value of the Hibernate Timeout setting except when it is set to Disabled e Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting Press Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts to a short press of the Sleep button Note Sleep is the factory default setting Press and Hold Sleep Button Do nothing Sleep Hibernate Factory Defaults Do Not Restore Restore Now Determine how the printer while in idle state reacts when you press and hold the Sleep button Note Do nothing is the factory default setting Restore the printer settings to the factory default settings Notes Do Not Restore is the factory default setting Do Not Restore keeps the user defined settings Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network Ports menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the printer hard disk are not affected Custom Home Message Off I
266. paper then make sure that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray b Check if the tray closes properly Is the tray working Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting Action Step 2 a Turn off the printer then wait about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on b Resend the print job Is the tray working Yes The problem is solved 312 No Go to step 3 Step 3 Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer Print a menu settings page and then check if the tray is listed in the Installed Features list Step 4 Check if the tray is available in the printer driver Note If necessary manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 34 Is the tray available in the printer driver Go to step 4 The problem is solved Reinstall the tray For more information see the setup documentation that came with the tray Is the tray listed in the menu settings page Contact customer support USB parallel interface card does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed a Install the USB or parallel interface card For more i
267. paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray e Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator e Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type b Insert the tray properly If jam recovery is enabled then the print jobs will reprint automatically Do paper jams still occur frequently Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved Step 2 a Load paper from a fresh package Note Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it b Resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Step 3 a Review the tips on avoiding jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 260 b Follow the recommendations and then resend the print job Do paper jams still occur frequently Go to step 3 Contact customer support The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting 314 Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared Action Yes No a Do either of the following Contact customer The problem is solved support e For touch screen printer models touch ZS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK b Follow the instructions on the printer display Does the paper jam message remain Print quality p
268. paper or specialty media at a time e Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled Using MS812de 156 e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher not XR One sided printing Two sided printing One sided printing Two sided printing w e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur One sided printing Two sided printing Using MS812de 157 Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder Warning Potential Damage Never use envelopes with stamps clasps snaps windows coated linings or self stick adhesives These envelopes may severely damage the printer e Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams 6 For custom or Universal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
269. paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support 2 Paper is supported in long edge orientation 3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm 4 13 in to 216 mm 8 5 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 356 mm 14 in Paper and specialty media guide 182 Paper size Dimensions SECER Kol Optional Multipurpose Duplex optional 250 or 2100 sheet tray feeder 550 sheet tray Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm V X V X 3 9 x 6 4 in to 176 x 250 mm 6 9 x 9 8 in 1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel then you may select common paper sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size Type menu If the paper size is not available then select Universal or turn off tray size sensing For more information contact customer support 2 Paper is supported in long edge orientation 3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm 4 13 in to 216 mm 8 5 in and the length is from 148 mm 5 83 in to 356 mm 14 in Paper sizes types and weights supported by the output options Supported paper sizes Paper size 4 bin mailbox Output expander and Staple finisher Staple hole punch high capa
270. precautions Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer e Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware options Keep the printer in an upright position e Avoid severe jarring movements Shipping the printer When shipping the printer use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit Clearing jams 260 Clearing jams Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid paper jams If jams occur then follow the steps outlined in this chapter Note Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks Avoiding jams Load paper properly e Make sure paper lies flat in the tray Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper e Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing e Do not load a tray while the printer is printing Load it before printing or wait for a prompt to load it e Do not load too much paper Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator Clearing jams 261 e Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration e Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly against the paper or envelopes e Pu
271. printer setup 13 4 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic component or connector 1 Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector Option card connector 3 Memory card connector Additional printer setup 5 Align the screws with the holes on the shield and then reattach the shield 6 Tighten the screws on the shield 14 Additional printer setup 15 7 Reattach the access cover 2 Installing a memory card A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer Warning Potential Damage Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board 1 Access the controller board For more information
272. r and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Remote Operator Panel Settings Using MS812de 138 3 Select the Enable check box and then customize the settings 4 Click Submit To use the application click Remote Operator Panel gt Launch VNC Applet Loading paper and specialty media The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print For more information see Avoiding jams on page 260 and Storing paper on page 179 Setting the paper size and type From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Paper Size Type gt select a tray gt select a paper size or type gt Submit Notes The paper size is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder e The paper size for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu e The paper type must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper Configuring Universal paper settings Universal paper size is a user defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus Notes e The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm 2 76 x 5 inches for one sided printing and 105 x 148 mm
273. r both are obtained the stored jobs print Notes e Offis the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a formatted working printer hard disk is installed This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power Set the logical and physical printable area Notes Normal is the factory default setting When attempting to print data in the non printable area defined by the Normal setting the printer clips the image at the boundary e Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size e Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non printable area defined by the Normal setting but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter Set the storage location for downloads Notes RAM is the factory default setting Storing downloads in the RAM is temporary e Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage Downloads remain in the flash memory or printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off e This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory or a formatted working printer hard disk is installed Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads such as fonts and macros stored in the RAM when the printer receives a print job that requires
274. r home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 3 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name 4 Click Submit 5 Click Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Using the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Custom Names 2 Select a custom name and then type a custom paper type name Using MS812de 159 3 Touch Submit 4 Touch Custom Types and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name Assigning a custom paper type Using the Embedded Web Server Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 3 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 4 Click Submit Using
275. r models may not have a printer hard disk installed Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 Using MS810de 126 e If you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Disk Encryption Note Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted non defective printer hard disk is installed 3 From the Disk encryption menu select Enable Notes e Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks 4 Click Submit Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Touch Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e Do not turn off the printer durin
276. r mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 1 Turn off the printer using the power switch and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 2 Unpack the optional tray and then remove all packing material 3 Pull out the tray completely from the base 4 Remove any packing material from inside the tray 5 Insert the tray into the base 6 Place the tray near the printer 7 Align the optional tray with the caster base Note Make sure to lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer Additional printer setup 8 Align the printer with the tray and then slowly lower the printer into place Note Optional trays lock together when stacked 30 Additional printer setup 31 9 Connect the power cord to the printer then to a properly grounded electrical outlet and then turn on the printer Additional printer setup 32 Note When the printer software and any optional trays are installed you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs For more information see Adding available options in the print driver on page 34 To uninstall the optional trays slide the latch o
277. r output expander door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed Clearing jams 279 3 Close the rear output expander door 4 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing For touch screen printer models touch oS or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK Clearing jams 280 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xx 1 Open the rear mailbox door 2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 3 Close the rear mailbox door Clearing jams 281 4 Ifthe jam is in the mailbox bin then firmly grasp the jammed paper and then gently pull it out Note Make sure all paper fragments are removed 5 Do either of the following to clear the message and continue printing e For touch screen printer models touch v4 or Done For non touch screen printer models select Next gt OK gt Clear the jam press OK gt OK Troubleshooting 282 Troubleshooting Understanding the printer messages Cartridge low 88 xy You may need to order a toner cartridge If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm
278. r settings 3 Arrow buttons Scroll up and down or left and right 4 Keypad Enter numbers letters or symbols 5 Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode e Press any hard button e Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder e Open a door or cover Send a print job from the computer e Perform a power on reset with the main power switch Attach a device to the USB port on the printer 6 Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity 7 Back button Return to the previous screen 8 Home button Go to the home screen 9 Indicator light Check the status of the printer Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 43 Use the USB port _ a flash drive to the printer Note Only the front USB port supports flash drives Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status or condition Printer status Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode Blinking green The printer is warming up processing data or printing Solid green The printer is on but idle Blinking red The printer requires user intervention J Sleep button light Printer status off The printer is off idle or in Ready state Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode Blinking amber The printer is entering or waki
279. ral minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Navigate to Disk Encryption gt Enable Note Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk 4 Select Yes to proceed with disk wiping Notes e Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process Doing so may result in loss of data e Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks e A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task After the disk has been encrypted the printer will return to the screen for enabling or disabling disk encryption 5 Navigate to Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Finding printer security information In high security environments it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons For more information visit the Lexmark security Web page You ca
280. ration information 36 wireless network setup using the Embedded Web Server 38 wireless setup wizard using 37 X XPS menu 234
281. rd disk onto the ISP a Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket and then remove the bracket b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 25 4 Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage and then press the printer hard disk down until the standoffs are in place Installation warning Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly Do not touch or press on the center of the printer hard disk Doing so may cause damage Note Make sure the cables are neatly tucked under the printer hard disk 5 Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board Note The plugs and receptacles are color coded Additional printer setup 26 PATRAAAASSSS Removing a printer hard disk Note This task requires a flat head screwdriver A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting u
282. rd from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra bins 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many disks installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra printer hard disks Troubleshooting 298 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many flash options installed 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra flash memory 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Too many trays attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Remove the extra trays 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on Tray x paper size unsupported The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported Replace it with a supported paper size Unformatted flash detected 53 Try one or more of the following From the printer control select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Format the flash memory Note If the error message remains then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced Unsupported disk 1 Remove the unsupported disk and then install a s
283. re print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting Verify Job Expiration Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed Reserve Job Expiration Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Notes e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs e You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel e All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 69 2 Press OK Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN uw Click OK or Print oa From
284. reboots that is set in the printer within a certain amount of time then the printer shows the applicable error instead of rebooting Set the number of automatic reboots that the printer can perform Notes e Sis the factory default setting e If the printer performs a number of automatic reboots that is the same as the menu setting within a certain amount of time then the printer displays the applicable error instead of rebooting Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when these are not resolved within the specified time period Note Disabled is the factory default setting Print Recovery Jam Recovery On Off Auto Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages Notes e Auto is the factory default setting The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks e On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages e Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages Print Recovery Jam Assist On Off Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically Note On is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus Use Print Recovery Page Protect Off On Hibernate Timeout on Connection Do Not Hibernate Hibernate 224 To Let the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise Notes e Off is the factory default setting Off prints a partial
285. reen printer models Understanding the printer menus 232 Quality menu Use To Print Resolution Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch 300 dpi Note 600 dpi is the factory default setting 600 dpi 1200 dpi 1200 Image Q 2400 Image Q Pixel Boost Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity in order to enhance images horizontally off or vertically or to enhance fonts Fonts Note Off is the factory default setting Horizontally Vertically Both directions Toner Darkness Lighten or darken the printed output 1 10 Notes 8 is the factory default setting Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner Enhance Fine Lines Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings maps electrical On circuit diagrams and flow charts Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting e To set this option using the Embedded Web Server type the network printer IP address in the Web browser address field Gray Correction Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images Auto Note Auto is the factory default setting Off Brightness Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it You can conserve toner 6to6 by lightening the output Note 0 is the factory default setting Contrast Adjust the contrast of printed objects 0 5 Note 0 is the factory default setting S Job Accounting menu Note This menu item appears only
286. rical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floor mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order e Caster base e 2100 sheet tray or spacer e Optional 550 or 250 sheet tray Printer For more information on installing a caster base optional 550 or 250 sheet tray spacer or 2100 sheet tray see the setup sheet that came with the option Additional printer setup 29 Installing optional trays A CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY The printer weight is greater than 18 kg 40 Ib and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely A CAUTION SHOCK HAZARD If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer then turn the printer off and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing If you have any other devices attached to the printer then turn them off as well and unplug any cables going into the printer CAUTION TIPPING HAZARD Floo
287. ries of the European Union We encourage the recycling of our products If you have further questions about recycling options visit the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com for your local sales office phone number India E Waste notice This product complies with the India E Waste Management and Handling Rules 2011 which prohibit use of lead mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0 1 by weight and 0 01 by weight for cadmium except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules Product disposal Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste Consult your local authorities for disposal and recycling options Notices 338 Static sensitivity notice This symbol identifies static sensitive parts Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer ENERGY STAR Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency EPA ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark ENERGY STAR Temperature information Ambient operating temperature 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Shipping temperature 40 to 43 3 C 40 to 110 F Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35 C 34 to 95 F 8 to 80 RH Laser notice The printer is certified
288. rint quality problems Maintaining the printer 251 5 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Replacing the imaging unit 1 Lift the front cover and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door Maintaining the printer 252 2 Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle 4 Unpack the new imaging unit and then shake it 5 Remove all packing material from the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems Warning Potential Damage Do not touch the photoconductor drum Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs Maintaining the printer 253 6 Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer 7 Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the side rails inside the printer Maintaining the printer 254 8 Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover Replacing a staple cartridge 1 Open the stapler door 2 Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder and then pull the holder out of the finisher ay Maintaining the printer 255 3 Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers and then remove the staple case from the
289. rinter and toner cartridge warranties Before loading labels on the tray flex and fan labels to loosen them Straighten the edges on a level surface Note Vinyl and polyester labels are supported only in the MS710 Series printer models Tips on using transparencies From the printer control panel set the paper size type texture and weight in the Paper menu to match the transparencies loaded in the tray Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems Before loading transparencies flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together When printing on large volumes of transparencies make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an interval of at least three minutes between batches to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in the bin You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20 Paper guidelines Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems For the best print quality try a sample of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities Paper characteristics The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability Consider these factors before printing on them Paper and specialty media guide 177 Weight The printer trays and multipurp
290. rints Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved a Redistribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints Step 5 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Do vertical voids appear on prints support Contact customer The problem is solved Troubleshooting Solving home screen application probl This troubleshooting step applies only to touch screen printer models An application error has occurred Action Step 1 Check the system log for relevant details a Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field If you do not know the IP address of the printer then you can View the IP address on the printer home screen Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and then locate the IP address in the TCP IP section Note An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 b Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt System tab gt Log c From the Filter menu select an application status d From the Application menu select an application and
291. rmation on installing the wireless network adapter see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter e A Service Set Identifier SSID is a name assigned to a wireless network Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP Wi Fi Protected Access WPA WPA2 and 802 1X RADIUS are types of security used on a network Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network organize the following information before you begin Note If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers continue on to installing the printer e Avalid unique IP address for the printer to use on the network e The network gateway e The network mask e Anickname for the printer optional Note A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network You can choose to use the default printer nickname or assign a name that is easier for you to remember You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can physically connect to the network Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a damaged cable Additional printer setup 36 Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network Notes e Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter
292. rmit erkl rt Lexmark International Inc dass sich das Ger t dieses Ger t in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet ME THN NAPOYSA H LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC AHAQNEI OTI AYTO TO MPO ON ZYMMOPQQNETAI NPOZ TI2 OY IQAEI AMAITH EI KAI TI2 AOINE2 2XETIKEZ AIATA EIz TH OAHMIAZ 1999 S5 EK Hereby Lexmark International Inc declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Deutsch EAAnVIKH English Notices 352 Espa ol Por medio de la presente Lexmark International Inc declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE Eesti K esolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International Inc et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele s tetele Suomi Lexmark International Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett t m tuote on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sit koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen Fran ais Par la pr sente Lexmark International Inc d clare que l appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Magyar Alul rott Lexmark Internation
293. roblems Characters have jagged or uneven edges N ABC DEF Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Select a font that is a Print afont sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported supported by the by the printer printer 1 From the printer control panel navigate to Menus gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts b Resend the print job Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer Step 2 The problem is solved Contact customer Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer support Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer Troubleshooting Clipped pages or images Leading edge Trailing edge Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper loaded b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Yes Go to step 2 315 The problem is solved Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the paper size from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog b Resend the print job Is the page or image clipped Step 4 a Reinstall the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the imaging unit Warnin
294. rom the default paper source e Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with custom string paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper e Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer automatically overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray e Cancel the current job Troubleshooting 290 Load manual feeder with custom type name paper orientation Try one or more of the following Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size and type of paper e Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from an automatically selected tray e Cancel the current job Load manual feeder with paper size paper orientation Try one or more of the following e Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct size of paper e Depending on your printer model touch Continue or press OK to clear the message and continue printing Note If no paper is loaded in the feeder when Continue or OK is selected then the printer manually overrides the request and then prints from
295. rovide you with information to solve your problem Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative They can work with you to solve your printer problem or provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems install updates or complete other tasks to help you successfully use your Lexmark product Telephone support is also available In the U S or Canada call 1 800 539 6275 For other countries or regions visit http support lexmark com Notices 335 Notices Product information Product name Lexmark MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn MS810de MS812de Machine type 4063 Model s 210 230 23E 410 430 630 63E Edition notice October 2014 The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL INC PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporate
296. rs only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models Understanding the printer menus Use Hole Punch Mode 2 holes 3 holes 4 holes 226 To Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints Notes e 3 holes is the U S factory default setting 4 holes is the international factory default setting e This menu appears only when a supported staple hole punch finisher is installed Duplex Binding Long Edge Short Edge Paper Saver Orientation Auto Landscape Portrait Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed Notes e Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape This is the factory default setting Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape Specify the orientation of a multiple page document Notes Auto is the factory default setting This setting affects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the same menu is not set to Off Paper Saver Off 2 Up 3 Up 4 Up 6 Up 9 Up 12 Up 16 Up Specify that multiple page images be printed on one side of a paper Notes e Off is the factory default setting e The number selected is the number of page images that will print per s
297. rt x disabled 56 292 PPDS font error 50 292 Reattach bin x 292 Reattach bins x y 293 Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge 31 xy 293 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy 294 Remove defective disk 61 294 Remove packaging material area name 294 Remove paper from linked set bin name 294 Remove paper from all bins 294 Remove paper from bin x 294 Index Remove paper from standard output bin 294 Replace cartridge 0 estimated pages remain 88 xy 295 Replace cartridge printer region mismatch 42 xy 295 Replace imaging unit O estimated pages remain 84 xy 295 Replace maintenance kit 0 estimated pages remain 80 xy 295 Replace missing or unresponsive fuser 31 xy 293 Replace roller kit 81 xx 296 Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy 296 Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy 296 Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy 296 Restore held jobs 296 Serial port x disabled 56 296 Some held jobs were not restored 297 Standard network software error 54 297 Standard USB port disabled 56 297 Supply needed to complete job 297 Too many bins attached 58 297 Too many disks installed 58 297 Too many flash options installed 58 298 Too many trays attached 58 298 Tray x paper size unsupported 298 Unformatted flash detected 53 298 Unsupported disk 298 Unsupported option in slot x 55 299 Unsupported USB hub please remove 285 US
298. rty Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA 256 382 and AES Galois Counter Mode GCM implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security TLS implemented in the product or service The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for AES CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom Corp at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm ECDSA implemented in the product or service The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable non discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property Rights IPR Disclosure of Certicom
299. s and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Notices 336 Trademarks Lexmark Lexmark with diamond design MarkNet and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International Inc registered in the United States and or other countries Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PCL is Hewlett Packard Company s designation of a set of printer commands language and functions included in its printer products This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE Apple Chancery Apple Computer Inc Arial The Monotype Corporation plc CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc is a product of Agfa Corporation Chicago Apple Computer Inc Clarendon Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Eurostile Nebiolo Geneva Apple Computer Inc GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc Helvetica Linotype Hell AG and or its subsidiaries Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry ITC Ava
300. s on the printer hard disk before printing Off Notes On Auto e Off is the factory default setting The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk e On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk e Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port e Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart The menu selection is then updated Protocol Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port DTR Notes DTR DSR XON XOFF DTR is the factory default setting XON XOFF DTR DTR DSR is a hardware handshaking setting XONXOFF DTRDSR e XON XOFF is a software handshaking setting e XON XOFF DTR and XON XOFF DTR DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings Robust XON Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer On Notes Off e Off is the factory default setting e This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON XOFF Baud Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port 1200 Notes 2400 4800 e 9600 is the factory default setting 9600 138200 172800 230400 and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the 19200 Standard Serial menu These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1 Serial Option 2 or Serial Option 3 menus 38400 57600 115200 138200 172800 230400 345600 Data Bits Specify the num
301. s process at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed e The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer ignores the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer Na 4 Click Submit Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the home screen navigate to AJ Settings gt General Settings gt Timeouts gt Sleep Mode 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power saving mode Notes Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode e Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode e Ifthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings 2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button 3 Touch Hibernate gt a Restoring factory default settings If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings For mor
302. sage and continue printing Replace unsupported cartridge 32 xy Remove the toner cartridge and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement cartridge then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Replace unsupported fuser 32 xy Remove the fuser and then install a supported one For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the part Replace unsupported imaging unit 32 xy Remove the imaging unit and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide Note If you do not have a replacement imaging unit then see the Ordering supplies section of the User s Guide or visit www lexmark com Restore held jobs Try one or more of the following Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Serial port x disabled 56 Try one or more of
303. sal size paper adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack 7 From the printer control panel set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 63 Linking and unlinking trays The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same When a linked tray becomes empty paper feeds from the next linked tray To prevent trays from linking assign a unique custom paper type name Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP IP section under the Network Ports menu The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking e To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray e To unlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information Ul see
304. sed SMTP Server Authentication Specify the type of user authentication required for printing privileges No authentication required Note No authentication required is the factory default setting Login Plain CRAM MD5 Digest MD5 NTLM Kerberos 5 ee Understanding the printer menus 211 Use a Ke Device Initiated E mail Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP None server Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e mail Use Device SMTP Credentials Notes User Initiated E mail None is the factory default setting for Device Initiated E mail and None User Initiated E mail Use Device SMTP Credentials Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP Use Session User ID amp Password server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected Use Session E mail address amp Password e User Initiated E mail Kerberos 5 Realm and NTLM Domain appear Prompt User only in touch screen printer models Device Userid Device Password Kerberos 5 Realm NTLM Domain Security menu Edit Security Setups menu Note This menu appears only in select touch screen printer models Use To Edit Backup Password Create a backup password Use Backup Password Notes e Off Big e Off is the factory default setting for Use Backup Password n e This menu appears only if a backup password exists Password PP y PP Edit Building Blocks Edit settings for In
305. select Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message Note Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk Disk near full Securely clearing disk space Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm e Delete fonts macros and other data stored in the printer hard disk Troubleshooting 285 Install a hard disk with higher capacity Empty the hole punch box Try one or more of the following Empty the hole punch box e Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing e Cancel the print job Error reading USB drive Remove USB An unsupported USB device is inserted Remove the USB device and then insert a supported one Error reading USB hub Remove hub An unsupported USB hub has been inserted Remove the USB hub and then install a supported one Imaging unit low 84 xy You may need to order an imaging unit If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Imaging unit nearly low 84 xy If necessary select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Imaging unit very low x estimated pages remain 84 xy You may need to replace th
306. sh the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray For more information see the Loading paper and specialty media section of the User s Guide Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly e Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used Notes Ifthe bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on then the paper causes a jam in the mailbox bin For example if you are printing on a legal size paper and the bin extender is set to letter size then a jam occurs Ifthe bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on then the edges become uneven and the paper is not stacked properly For example if you are printing on a letter size paper and the bin extender is set to legal size then the paper does not stack properly Clearing jams 262 e f paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin then insert the paper under the bin arm and then push the paper all the way back Note If the paper is not under the bin arm then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin Use recommended paper e Use only recommended paper or specialty media e Do not load wrinkled creased damp bent or curled paper e Flex fan and straighten paper or specialty
307. shreds the hard disk into small metal bits Note Most data can be erased electronically but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored Erasing volatile memory The volatile memory RAM installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information To erase the buffered data simply turn off the printer Erasing non volatile memory Erase individual settings device and network settings security settings and embedded solutions by following these steps 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons 3 Touch Wipe All Settings The printer will restart several times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Touch Back gt Exit Config Menu Using MS810de 125 The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Erasing printer hard disk memory Notes Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed e Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you re
308. sided printing for all print jobs with Card Stock as the paper type Recycled Loading Duplex Off Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Recycled as the paper type Labels Loading Duplex Off Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Labels as the paper type Vinyl Labels Loading Duplex Off Bond Loading Duplex Off Letterhead Loading Duplex Off Preprinted Loading Duplex Off Colored Loading Duplex Off Light Loading Duplex Off Notes e Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl Labels as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Bond as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Letterhead as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Preprinted as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Colored as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Light as the paper type Understanding the printer menus Use Heavy Loading Duplex Off Rough Cotton Loading Duplex off Custom
309. size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 141 3 Unlock the length guide and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded Notes e Lock the length guide for all paper sizes e Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides Using MS812de 142 4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 5 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Two sided printing Two sided printing e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray One sided printing Two sided printing Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Using MS812de 143 e Do not slide the paper into the tray Load paper as shown in the illustration e f you are loading envelopes then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on the left side of the tray Using MS812de 144 e Make sure the paper is below the solid li
310. snseeeees 134 Loading paper and specialty Meia cceccsssssssececeeceecesssseusceeeceesseesesseusaeeeeecesseseeessseseeeeeeseesseeeeeess 138 AAL IN e E E E E E A E A E E E A E E E eoueniye 159 Managing YOUN Printe N i cccsstsaacdecsesstaaae causes cad ENEE aN E E ENEN EEEO ANER EESE REENER EEDS 165 Contents 3 Paper and specialty Media Quide sscesccssccsccsscssccsscssccsscsscssccssesseeee LID USING specialty mediasie ia nsee enea are a EEEa E von sossvaehsadebea canoe yedsate bedaasa ev EA A EORNA E e aa a 175 PaperguideliNe Siini a a a a a aaa aiii 176 Supported paper sizes types and WEIGHTS c cscccccccceecesssssnsneseeceeceecesseesesssnseseeseseeessesesesnsaueseeseeeness 180 Understanding the printer MenuS ssssssssssesesssesssecseossosssscseossosesseessse LOD MENUS listare O ees cei EE suded A A ore Sua E A TEE aa a ie de E T EES 185 E ET PAN A A E AT E E EA seca T 186 Reports mEn eai TA EEr EAE EEE EAE 197 Network Ports menussiinscnnomercnnnu e a A A E E E A 198 eTo TATE Eaa EE E E A A A A A A E E E doanyedsetees 211 Serine s MEn eiste EEEE eid ves te OEE A EEE ENAREN ANA EAER 215 aA aE E A E A TN E AES 241 Saving money and the environment ssssssssessssssssssosecssossossssssesssesessee Lad Adjusting the brightness of the printer Gisplay c cssssccccceccssssessseceeceeceecescessssusaseceeeesessesesnenanesses 243 Saving paper and LOMED ss 2sverssscadveicacsdesadvavaceds e
311. ssette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source e Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs e First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source Substitute Size menu Use a Ke Substitute Size Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available Off Notes Statement A5 ts Letter A4 e All Listed is the factory default setting All available substitutions are 3 allowed All Listed e Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed e Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change Paper appearing ee es Understanding the printer menus Paper Texture menu Use Plain Texture To Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Card Stock Texture Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray Smooth Notes Normal i Rough e Normal is the factory default setting e These options appear only if card stock is supported Transparency Texture Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Recycled Texture Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray Smooth Note Normal is the factory default setting Normal Rough Labels Texture
312. ssseceeceeescessssusseececessesesssnsaeeeseeeeesesenes 270 x page jam remove tray 1 to clear duplex 235 239 cccccccccccecesssssssnssseceeceeceeeesssssnsnsaeeseeeeseeeeees 270 x page jam open tray X BAe cocseddvaceesecendcdbveese caeedadesesOed obadeslancesvadesouddvuadertecddadadevveas eia 271 x page jam clear manual feeder 250 cccccccssssssssnsneceeceeceecessesssaueaseceeceecescessseusaeeseeeeesessessnaness 272 x page jam remove paper open stapler door Leave paper in bin 455 457 cceceeessssseeeeeeees 273 Contents 4 x page jam remove paper open finisher rear door Leave paper in bin 451 ccc eseseseseeeees 277 x page jam remove paper open expander rear door Leave paper in bin 41y xx c cc0eeees 278 x page jam remove paper open mailbox rear door Leave paper in bin 43y xX ccccccccseseeeees 280 TROUDIESNOOUN G4 cans cevsscasssavcasevadeveecanvedyorssrnnessbasaveensaasanbewersoenerereseweraloe Understanding the printer MeSSAES cccccccccccececccsssssssnsnsseeceeeccsseesesnsnsaueseeeeeessesesseesaueseeseeeeesseseeeeess 282 SOIWING printer proble MSsir divaseotsetacds We ee te tLe deal sa seals HUT sev eek Girt aR 299 Solving home screen application ProDleMs csscsccccccccssssssseccceeccssessnseceeceescsssesnseseeeeesesesesnaueeeseeeess 333 Embedded Web Server does not OPenn ccccceecessesseseeneneaeaeaeececceeecesessesesesnsnsnsauaueeeeeces
313. step 2 a From the Quality Menu on the printer control panel decrease the toner darkness Note 8 is the factory default setting b Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge a Remove the toner cartridge b Remove the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light can cause print quality problems c Install the imaging unit and then the cartridge d Resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Yes The problem is solved 317 No Go to step 3 Step 3 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Did the gray background disappear from the prints Horizontal voids appear on prints Leading edge RRA Trailing edge Action Step 1 a Make sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Step 2 a Load the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 Go to step 3 Contact customer support z The problem is solved The problem is solved Troubleshooting Action Step 3 a Redis
314. t For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print For Macintosh users 1 With a document open choose File gt Print If necessary click the disclosure triangle to see more options 2 From the print options or Copies amp Pages pop up menu choose Job Routing 3 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN 4 Click OK or Print 5 From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Print For other print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt select the print job gt specify the number of copies gt Print Printing information pages Printing a font sample list 1 From the home screen navigate to XA gt Reports gt Print Fonts 2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts Using MS810de 117 Printing a directory list A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk From the home screen navigate to A gt Reports gt Print Directory Canceling a print job Canceling a print job from the printer control panel 1 From the home screen touch Cancel Jobs or press EJ on the keypad 2 Touch the job you want to cancel
315. t URL to Post Logs Set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full Notes e None is the factory default setting The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered Set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit 100MB Note None is the factory default setting Set where the printer posts job accounting logs E mail to Send Logs Log File Prefix Specify the e mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs Specify the prefix you want for the log file name Note The current host name defined in the TCP IP menu is used as the default log Na file prefix Understanding the printer menus Utilities menu Use Remove Held Jobs Confidential Held Not Restored All Format Flash Yes No Delete Downloads on Disk Delete Now Do Not Delete 234 To Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk Notes Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are stored in the printer hard disk Bookmarks print jobs on flash drives and other types of held jobs are not affected e Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the printer hard disk or printer memory Format the flash memory Warning Potential Damage Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted Notes e Yes deletes all data stored in the flash memory e No cancels the
316. t Page Protect gt Off b Resend the print job Did the job print The problem is solved The problem is solved The problem is solved Go to step 3 Go to step 4 Go to step 5 Troubleshooting Action Step 5 Install additional printer memory and then resend the print job Did the job print Print jobs do not print Action Step 1 a From the document you are trying to print open the Print dialog and check if you have selected the correct printer Note If the printer is not the default printer then you must select the printer for each document that you want to print b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved 306 Contact customer Go to step 2 Step 2 a Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on and if Ready appears on the printer display b Resend the print job Do the jobs print The problem is solved Go to step 3 Step 3 If an error message appears on the printer display then clear the message Note The printer continues to print after clearing the message Do the jobs print The problem is solved Go to step 4 Step 4 a Check if the ports USB serial or Ethernet are working and if the cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer Note For more information see the setup documentation that came with the printer b Resend the pr
317. t job Notes e 90 sec is the factory default setting e When the timer expires any partially printed page still in the printer is printed and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting e Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print job Notes 40 sec is the factory default setting e Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs Understanding the printer menus Use Timeouts Job Hold Timeout 5 255 sec 223 To Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queue Notes 30sec is the factory default setting e This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed Error Recovery Auto Reboot Reboot when idle Reboot always Reboot never Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Error Recovery Max Auto Reboots 1 20 Print Recovery Auto Continue Disabled 5 255 Set the printer to restart when an error is encountered Notes Reboot always is the factory default setting for Auto Reboot e 5 is the factory default setting for Max Auto Reboots e If the printer performs the same number of automatic
318. t to Off or set to Paper then the factory default setting is Bright e This menu appears only when an indicator light is installed on the bin or when an optional bin with an indicator light is added Audio Feedback Button Feedback On Off Volume 1 10 Specify whether icons and buttons have audio feedback Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback e Sis the factory default setting for Volume Show Bookmarks Yes No Web Page Refresh Rate 30 300 Contact Name Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models e Yes is the factory default setting When Yes is selected bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshes Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 120 is the factory default setting Specify a contact name for the printer Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server Understanding the printer menus Use Location Alarms Alarm Control Cartridge Alarm Staple Alarm Hole Punch Alarm 221 aI Specify the location of the printer Notes e This menu appears only in touch screen printer models e The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server
319. tation of text and graphics on the page Notes e Portrait is the factory default setting Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page PCL Emulation Settings Lines per Page 1 255 Specify the number of lines that print on each page Notes e 60 is the US factory default setting 64 is the international default setting The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page Paper Size and Orientation settings Select the Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page Understanding the printer menus Use PCL Emulation Settings A4 Width 198 mm 203 mm 237 To Set the printer to print on A4 size paper Notes e 198 mm is the factory default setting e The 203 mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of eighty 10 pitch characters PCL Emulation Settings Auto CR after LF On Off PCL Emulation Settings Auto LF after CR On Off Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return CR after a line feed LF control command Note Off is the factory default setting Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed LF after a carriage return CR control command Note Off is the factory default setting Tray Renumber Assign MP Feeder Off None 0 199 Assign Tray x Off None 0 1
320. ter models that have a wireless network adapter To access the menu navigate to Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless Use a Ke Wi Fi Protected Setup Establish a wireless network and enable network security Start Push Button Method Start PIN Method Notes e Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless network when buttons on both the printer and the access point wireless router are pressed within a given period of time Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the access point Enable Disable WPS Auto detection Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with Enable WPS uses Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method Disable Note Disable is the factory default setting Understanding the printer menus 203 Use aI Network Mode Specify the network mode BSS Type Notes Infrastructure Ad hoc e Infrastructure is the factory default setting This lets the printer access a network using an access point Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer Compatibility Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network 802 11b g Note 802 11b g n is the factory default setting 802 11b g n Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use View Signal Quality View the quality of the
321. ter stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options If you purchased a printer with a similar configuration then you may need additional furniture For more information see www lexmark com multifunctionprinters Using MS812de 128 The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the printer For more information on other configurations visit www lexmark com multifunctionprinters 8 Hardware option Alternative hardware option 1 Staple finisher Output expander 4 bin mailbox Staple hole punch finisher 2 4 bin mailbox e Staple finisher e Staple hole punch finisher Output expander Caster base None 2100 sheet tray None 550 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 250 sheet tray 550 sheet tray 4 bin mailbox Output expander oO NnN oO wu BR Ww Output expander 4 bin mailbox Using MS812de 129 The staple hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options e In a configuration with three optional finishers the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order e In a configuration with two optional finishers The staple finisher must always be on top The high capacity output expander must always be at the bottom The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high capacity output expander When using optional trays Always use a caster
322. ternal Accounts NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Internal Accounts Active Directory LDAP Password and PIN NTLM Simple Kerberos Setup Kerberos Setup Active Directory LDAP LDAP GSSAPI Password PIN Edit Security Templates Add or edit a security template list of available templates ee Understanding the printer menus 212 Use To Edit Access Controls Control access to printer menus firmware updates held jobs and other access Administrative Menus points Function Access Management Solutions Cancel jobs at the Device Miscellaneous Security Settings menu Note This menu appears only in touch screen printer models Use ae Login Restrictions Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control Login failures panel before all users are locked out Failure time frame Notes Lockout time sb os i e Login failures specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 10 3 attempts is the factory default setting Panel Login Timeout Remote Login Timeout e Failure time frame specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes 5 minutes is the factory default setting e Lockout time specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit Settings range from 1 to
323. ternational Inc nyilatkozom hogy a term k megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eldirasainak slenska H r me l sir Lexmark International Inc yfir v a essi vara er samr mi vi grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International Inc dichiara che questo questo prodotto conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Latviski Ar o Lexmark International Inc deklar ka is izstr d jums atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saist tajiem noteikumiem Lietuvi iuo Lexmark International Inc deklaruoja kad is produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB direktyvos nuostatas Malti Bil pre enti Lexmark International Inc jiddikjara li dan il prodott huwa konformi mal ti ijiet essenzjali u ma dispo izzjonijiet o rajn relevanti li jinsabu fid Direttiva 1999 5 KE Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International Inc dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Norsk Lexmark International Inc erkl rer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International Inc o wiadcza e niniejszy produkt jest z
324. the Paper menu set Configure to Cassette for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu Specify the paper size being manually loaded Note Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting Manual Paper Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Specify the paper type being manually loaded Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Manual for Manual Paper Type to appear as a menu Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus 189 Manual Envelope Size 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope Specify the envelope size being manually loaded Note 10 Envelope is the U S factory default setting DL Envelope is the international factory default setting 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Manual Envelope Type Specify the envelope type being manually loaded Envelope Note Envelope is the factory default setting Rough Envelope Custom Type x Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Configure MP menu Use AK Configure MP Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder Cassette Notes Manual First e Cassette is the factory default setting Ca
325. the following e Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port e Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is set to Enabled Troubleshooting 297 Some held jobs were not restored Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Note Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible Standard network software error 54 Try one or more of the following From the printer control panel select Continue to continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Turn off the printer and then turn it back on Update the network firmware in the printer or print server For more information visit the Lexmark support Web site at http support lexmark com Standard USB port disabled 56 From the printer control panel select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Notes e The printer discards any data received through the USB port e Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled Supply needed to complete job A supply needed to complete the job is missing Cancel the current job Too many bins attached 58 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power co
326. the print job Did the jobs print Yes The problem is solved The problem is solved 302 No Go to step 3 Contact customer support Envelope seals when printing Action a Use envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment Note Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can seal the flaps b Resend the print job Does the envelope seal when printing XR Yes Contact customer support The problem is solved Na Error message about reading the flash drive appears Action Step 1 Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB slot Note The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB slot Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB slot Yes Go to step 2 Insert the flash drive into the front USB slot Step 2 Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green Note A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy Is the indicator light blinking green Wait until the printer is ready then view the held jobs list and then print the documents Go to step 3 XX Troubleshooting 303 Action Yes No Step 3 Go to step 4 The problem is solved a Check for an error message on the display b Clear the message Does the error message still appear Step 4 Go to step 5 The problem is solved Check if the flash drive is s
327. the printer control panel 1 From the home screen navigate to gt Paper Menu gt Custom Types 2 Select a custom paper type name and then select a paper type Note Paper is the factory default paper type for all user defined custom names 3 Touch Submit Printing Printing a document Printing forms Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed Before you can use this application first set it up on the printer For more information see Setting up Forms and Favorites on page 136 1 From the printer home screen navigate to Forms and Favorites gt select the form from the list gt enter the number of copies gt adjust other settings 2 Depending on your printer model touch e oa or Submit Using MS812de 160 Printing a document 1 From the printer control panel set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded 2 Send the print job For Windows users a With a document open click File gt Print b Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup c Adjust the settings if necessary d Click OK gt Print For Macintosh users a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog 1 With a document open choose File gt Page Setup 2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded 3 Click OK b Customize the settings in the Print dialog 1 With a document open choos
328. the printer control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Quiet Mode gt OK 2 Select a setting Use Le On Reduce printer noise Notes e Print jobs process at a reduced speed e Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print There is a short delay before the first page is printed e The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off The printer ignores the Advance Start command Off Use factory default settings Note This setting supports the performance specifications of the printer X 3 Press OK Adjusting Sleep mode 1 From the control panel navigate to gt Settings gt OK gt Settings gt OK gt General Settings gt OK gt Timeouts gt OK gt Sleep Mode gt OK 2 Inthe Sleep Mode field select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode 3 Apply the changes Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 76 Using Hibernate mode Hibernate is an ultra low power saving mode Notes e Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode e Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job A hard reset or a long press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode e Ifthe printer is in Hibernate mode then the Embedded Web Server is disabled 1 From the control panel
329. the size of the paper being loaded Using MS812de 149 b Ifthe A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide then remove it from its place If the A5 length guide is not attached then proceed to step d c Put the AS length guide in its holder Using MS812de 150 d Squeeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks into place 3 Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them and then fan them Do not fold or crease the paper Straighten the edges on a level surface 4 Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown Note Make sure the paper is loaded properly e There are different ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is installed or not Using MS812de One sided printing Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher One sided printing XR Two sided printing Two sided printing 151 e If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher then make sure the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray Note If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray then a jam may occur Ses One sided printing Two sided printing i Using MS812de e Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator Warning Potential Damage Overfi
330. ting Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period Grain direction Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper Grain is either grain long running the length of the paper or grain short running the width of the paper For 60 176 g m 16 47 lb paper grain long paper is recommended Fiber content Most high quality xerographic paper is made from 100 chemically treated pulped wood This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling Selecting paper Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality e Always use new undamaged paper Before loading paper know the recommended printable side of the paper This information is usually indicated on the paper package Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand Paper and specialty media guide 178 Do not mix paper sizes types or weights in the same tray mixing results in jams Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead e Use grain long for 60 90 g m 16 24 Ib paper e
331. tion see Printing a menu settings page on page 167 If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings then perform the Wipe All A Settings option For more information see Erasing non volatile memory on page 172 Using MS812de 171 Warning Potential Damage Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings Exceptions include the display language custom sizes and messages and network port menu settings All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not affected From the home screen navigate to gt Settings gt General Settings gt Factory Defaults gt Restore Now gt Submit Securing the printer Using the security lock feature The printer is equipped with a security lock feature When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached the printer is locked When locked the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be removed Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown Statement of Volatility Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings and user data Type of memory Description Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory RAM to temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs Non volatile memory Your printer may use two
332. to one of the following e gt Settings gt OK gt Network Ports gt OK gt Network x gt OK gt Network x Setup gt OK gt Wireless gt OK gt Wireless Connection Setup gt OK eXA gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup e gt Network Ports gt Network x gt Network x Setup gt Wireless gt Wireless Connection Setup 2 Select a wireless connection setup Use To Show available wireless connections Note This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs Enter a network name Manually enter the SSID Search for networks Note Make sure to enter the correct SSID Wi Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi Fi Protected Setup 3 Follow the instructions on the printer display Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Wi Fi Protected Setup Before connecting the printer to a wireless network make sure that e The access point wireless router is Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS certified or WPS compatible For more information see the documentation that came with your access point e A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter Additional printer setup 38 Using the Push Button Configuration method 1
333. tomize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen From the home screen navigate to Change Background gt select background to use gt Apply Using MS812de 136 Setting up Forms and Favorites Note A later version of this User s Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator s Guide of this application To check for updates of this User s Guide visit http support lexmark com Use To Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen Note The printer must have permission to access the network folder FTP site or Web site where the bookmark is stored From the computer where the bookmark is stored use sharing security and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access For help see the documentation that came with your operating system i J 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Note View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 2 Click Settings gt Apps gt Apps Management gt Forms and Favorites 3 Click Add and then customize the settings Notes e See the mouse over help beside each field for a description of the setting To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct type the correct IP address of the host computer where the bookm
334. tray Note Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems Using MS812de 158 Linking and unlinking trays Linking and unlinking trays 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Paper Menu 3 Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking e To link trays make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray e To unlink trays make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray 4 Click Submit Note You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel For more information see Setting the paper size and type on page 138 Warning Potential Damage Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type Printing issues may occur if settings are not properly configured Creating a custom name for a paper type Using the Embedded Web Server 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Notes e View the printer IP address on the printe
335. tribute the toner in the imaging unit 1 Remove the toner cartridge and then the imaging unit 2 Firmly shake the imaging unit Warning Potential Damage Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems 3 Reinstall the imaging unit and then the cartridge b Resend the print job Do horizontal voids appear on prints Yes Go to step 4 318 No The problem is solved Step 4 Replace the imaging unit and then resend the print job Contact customer support Do horizontal voids appear on prints X The problem is solved Incorrect margins on prints BS ABC DEF Action Step 1 a Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded b Resend the print job Are the margins correct Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Step 2 From the printer control panel set the paper size in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray Go to step 3 Do one or more of the following e Specify the paper size from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray Change the paper loaded in the tray to match the paper size specified in the tray settings CS a i Troubleshooting Action Step 3 a Depending on your operating system specify the
336. ts for recycling 1 Go to www lexmark com recycle 2 Find the product type you want to recycle and then select your country or region from the list 3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen Note Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept Saving money and the environment 245 Recycling Lexmark packaging Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions energy savings and natural resource savings Lexmark cartons are 100 recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist Facilities may not exist in your area When you return a cartridge to Lexmark you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in Lexmark will recycle the box Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling One hundred percent of the e
337. tting e From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for Multipurpose Feeder or MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting Manual Envelope e If two trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have the same settings then the trays are automatically linked When one tray is empty the print job continues using the linked tray 1 This menu appears only in touch screen printer models 2 This menu appears only in non touch screen printer models Paper Size Type menu Tray x Size Specify the paper size loaded in each tray A4 Notes A5 A6 Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory JIS B5 default setting Letter e ftwo trays contain paper of the same size and type and the trays have aes the same settings then the trays are automatically linked The multipurpose feeder may also be linked When one tray is empty the Executive print job continues using the linked tray Oficio Mexico e The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the multipurpose Folio feeder Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu 187 Understanding the printer menus Tray x Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Co
338. tton Custom Type x MP Feeder Size A4 AS A6 JIS BS Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 7 3 4 Envelope 9 Envelope 10 Envelope DL Envelope C5 Envelope B5 Envelope Other Envelope Specify the paper type loaded in each tray Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1 Custom Type x is the factory default setting for all other trays e If available a user defined name will appear instead of Custom Type x Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes Letter is the U S factory default setting A4 is the international factory default setting From the Paper menu set Configure MP to Cassette for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size Make sure to set the paper size value Note Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu Understanding the printer menus MP Feeder Type Plain Paper Card Stock Transparency Recycled Labels Bond Envelope Rough Envelope Letterhead Preprinted Colored Paper Light Paper Heavy Paper Rough Cotton Custom Type x Manual Paper Size A4 A5 A6 JIS B5 Letter Legal Executive Oficio Mexico Folio Statement Universal 188 Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder Notes e Plain Paper is the factory default setting e From
339. two or more trained personnel to lift it safely Before moving the printer AN CAUTION POTENTIAL INJURY Before moving the printer follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage Turn off the printer and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer e f two or more optional finishers are installed then remove the finishers individually from the printer Notes Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first To remove the finisher hold the finisher on both sides and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher Maintaining the printer 258 e ifthe printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays then remove the trays Note Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into place Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it e Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer s authorized replacement Maintaining the printer 259 Warning Potential Damage Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty Moving the printer to another location The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these
340. type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel e Make sure that the paper size is correctly set For example if Multipurpose Feeder Size or MP Feeder Size is set to Universal then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed e Cancel the print job Insert hole punch box Insert the hole punch box into the finisher and then select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Insert staple cartridge Try one or more of the following Insert a staple cartridge For more information see the instruction sheet that came with the supply e Select Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Insert Tray x Try one or more of the following Insert the specified tray into the printer e Cancel the print job e Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel Troubleshooting 287 Install bin x Try one or more of the following e Install the specified bin 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet 3 Install the specified bin 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on e Cancel the print job Reset active bin Install Tray x Try one or more of the following Install
341. upply The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached Continuable Stopt The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached and the user needs to press a button to continue printing Non Continuable Stop The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached The supply must be replaced to continue printing 1 The printer generates an e mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled 2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage 4 Click Submit Modifying confidential print settings 1 Open a Web browser and then type the printer IP address in the address field Using MS810de 119 Notes e View the printer IP address on the printer home screen The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods such as 123 123 123 123 e f you are using a proxy server then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly 2 Click Settings gt Security gt Confidential Print Setup 3 Modify the settings e Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts When a user exceeds that number all of the jobs for that user are deleted e Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs When a user has not printed the jobs within that time all of the jobs for that user are deleted 4 Click Submit to save the modified settings Copying printer settings to other printers Note This feature is available only in networ
342. upport Printer display is blank Action Step 1 Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel Does Ready appear on the printer display Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 X Step 2 Turn off the printer then wait for about 10 seconds and then turn the printer back on Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display Printing problems Confidential and other held jobs do not print Action Step 1 a From the printer control panel open the Held Jobs folder and then verify that your print job is listed b Resend the print job For more information see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 69 for non touch screen printer models For touch screen printer models see Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 116 or Printing confidential and other held jobs on page 164 Did the jobs print The problem is solved Yes The problem is solved Turn off the printer and then contact customer support a Go to step 2 N Troubleshooting Action Step 2 Do one or more of the following e Delete the print job and then resend it e If you are printing PDF files then generate a new file and then print it again Did the jobs print Step 3 a Increase the printer memory Do one or more of the following e Delete some print jobs Install additional printer memory b Resend
343. upported For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives see Supported flash drives and file types on page 67 for non touch screen printer models For touch screen printer models see Supported flash drives and file types on page 114 and Supported flash drives and file types on page 162 Does the error message still appear Step 5 Check if the USB slot is disabled by the system support person Does the error message still appear X Contact customer support The problem is solved Incorrect characters print Action Step 1 Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode Note If Ready Hex appears on the printer display then turn off the printer and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode Is the printer in Hex Trace mode Step 2 a From the printer control panel select Standard Network or Network x and then set SmartSwitch to On b Resend the print job Do incorrect characters print io Yes Deactivate Hex Trace mode Contact customer support a Go to step 2 The problem is solved Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper Action Step 1 a Check if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray b Resend the print job Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper Yes The problem is solved No Go to step 2 Troubleshooting 304 Action
344. upported one 2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Troubleshooting 299 Unsupported option in slot x 55 1 Turn off the printer 2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet 3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board and then replace it with a supported card 4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet 5 Turn the printer back on USB port x disabled 56 Try one or more of the following Select Continue to clear the message For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins e Make sure the USB Buffer menu is enabled Solving printer problems e Printer does not respond on page 299 e Printing problems on page 301 e Hardware and internal option problems on page 309 e Paper feed problems on page 313 e Print quality problems on page 314 Printer does not respond The printer is not responding Action Yes No Step 1 Go to step 2 Turn on the printer Make sure the printer is turned on Is the printer turned on Step 2 Press the Sleep button Go to step 3 to wake the printer from Sleep mode or Hibernate mode Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode
345. ure Description Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks Warning If an error condition occurs then this icon appears Printer IP address The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen Example 123 123 123 123 You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer settings Using MS810de 86 Using the touch screen buttons Note Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded solutions Touch the Radio button Select or clear an item Up arrow Scroll up Downarrow Scroll down Accept button Save a setting Cancel button e Cancel an action or a selection e Return to the previous screen Touch Ke Return to the home screen Open a context sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel Scroll to the left Scroll to the right Using MS810de 87 Setting up and using the home screen applications Notes e Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings administrative setup and active embedded applications Some applications are supported only in some printer models e There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase For more informati
346. ve setup and active embedded solutions Bookmarks Held USB Language i Jobs Using MS810de 85 To Change Language Change the primary language of the printer Bookmarks Create organize and save a set of bookmarks URLs into a tree view of folders and file links Note The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and Favorites and the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites Held Jobs Display all current held jobs USB View select or print photos and documents from a flash drive Note This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer Access printer menus Note These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state Status message bar Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy Show the status of printer supplies e Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them Status Supplies e Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing e View more information on the printer warning or message and on how to clear it View a context sensitive help information These may also appear on the home screen Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user Profiles and Apps Access profiles and applications Features Feat
347. veral times during this process Note Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings solutions jobs and passwords from the printer memory 4 Navigate to Back gt Exit Config Menu The printer will perform a power on reset and then return to normal operating mode Using MS810n MS810dn MS811n MS811dn MS812dn 79 Erasing printer hard disk memory Notes Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed e Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion Using the printer control panel 1 Turn off the printer 2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears The printer performs a power on sequence and then the Configuration menu appears When the printer is fully turned on a list of functions appears on the printer display 3 Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears and then select one of the following e Wipe disk fast This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass e Wipe disk secure This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times followed by a verification pass A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220 22 M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk Highly confidential information should be wiped usin
348. when a printer hard disk is installed Make sure that the hard disk is not read write or write protected Job Accounting Log Set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives Off Note Off is the factory default setting On Understanding the printer menus Use Job Accounting Utilities 233 To Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive Accounting Log Frequency Daily Weekly Monthly Set how often a log file is created Note Monthly is the factory default setting Log Action at End of Frequency None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires Note None is the factory default setting Log Near Full Level Off 1 99 Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action at Near Full Note 5 is the factory default setting Log Action at Near Full None E mail Current Log E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post Current Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Current Log Action at Full None E mail amp Delete Current Log E mail amp Delete Oldest Log Post amp Delete Current Log Post amp Delete Oldest Log Delete Current Log Delete Oldest Log Delete All Logs Delete All But Curren
349. with your printer see Using recycled paper and other office papers on page 178 Saving money and the environment 244 Conserving supplies Use both sides of the paper If your printer model supports two sided printing then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper Notes e Two sided printing is the default setting in the print driver e For a complete list of supported products and countries go to http support lexmark com Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by setting multiple page printing N Up for the print job Check your first draft for accuracy Before printing or making multiple copies of a document e Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy Avoid paper jams 1 Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams For more information see Avoiding jams on page 260 Recycling Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling For more information see e The Notices chapter e The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www lexmark com environment e The Lexmark recycling program at www lexmark com recycle Recycling Lexmark products To return Lexmark produc
350. x Loading 194 Le Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Rough or Cotton as the paper type Determine and set two sided printing for all print jobs with Custom x Custom Types menu Use Custom Type x Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope Recycled Paper Card Stock Transparency Rough Cotton Labels Vinyl Labels Envelope Custom Names menu Duplex as the paper type off Note Custom x Loading is available only when the custom type is supported Notes e Offis the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections e Duplex sets the printer default to two sided printing for every print job unless one sided printing is selected from Print Properties or the print dialog depending on your operating system a Ke Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom type name or a user defined custom name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVision Professional Notes e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus Notes e Paper is the factory default setting e The custom media type must be supported by the selected
351. xamine if the first copy is satisfactory or not The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed Verify Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time Note The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu Reserve Job Expiration Notes e Confidential Verify Reserve and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs e You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel e All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs L d Using MS810de 116 2 Touch Sa Printing confidential and other held jobs Note Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you delete them For Windows users 1 With a document open click File gt Print 2 Click Properties Preferences Options or Setup 3 Click Print and Hold 4 Select the print job type Confidential Repeat Reserve or Verify and then assign a user name For a confidential print job also enter a four digit PIN uw Click OK or Print oa From the printer home screen release the print job e For confidential print jobs navigate to Held jobs gt select your user name gt Confidential Jobs gt enter the PIN gt Prin
352. xy Try one or more of the following Remove the unresponsive fuser and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the fuser is defective Replace the fuser e Install the missing fuser For more information on installing the fuser see the instruction sheet that came with the part Troubleshooting 294 Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit 31 xy Try one or more of the following e Check if the imaging unit is missing If missing install the imaging unit For information on installing the imaging unit see the Replacing supplies section of the User s Guide e ifthe imaging unit is installed then remove the unresponsive imaging unit and then reinstall it Note If the message appears after reinstalling the supply then the imaging unit is defective Replace the imaging unit Remove defective disk 61 Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk Remove packaging material area name 1 Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location 2 Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing For non touch screen printer models press OK to confirm Remove paper from all bins Bins have reached their capacity Remove paper from all bins to clear the message and continue printing If removing the paper does not clear the message then select Continue on the printer control panel For non touch screen printer models press OK
353. y connected to the internal print server Does the internal print server operate correctly Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly Action Step 1 Make sure the Internal Solutions Port ISP is installed i a Install the ISP For more information see Installing an Internal Solutions Port on page 16 b Printa menu settings page and then check if the ISP is listed in the Installed Features list Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list Step 2 Check the cable and the ISP connection a Use the correct cable and then make sure it is securely connected to the ISP b Check if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected into the receptacle of the controller board Note The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on the controller board are color coded Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly Mi Yes The problem is solved Yes Go to step 2 The problem is solved 311 No Contact customer support a Check if you have a supported ISP Note An ISP from another printer may not work on this printer Contact customer support Tray problems Action Step 1 a Pull out the tray and then do one or more of the following e Check for paper jams or misfeeds Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray e If you are printing on custom size

User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents